Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Firmware Manual
System Control Program 7.x
3AFE64670646 REV D
EN
EFFECTIVE: 10.12.2007
Table of contents
Table of contents
Introduction to the manual
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
Start-up
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to start-up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Control panel
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to adjust a source selection parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to copy parameters from one drive to other drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to set the contrast of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
33
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
42
43
43
45
45
46
46
Table of contents
Program features
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMIO board connection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control through communication link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control through I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undervoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If an emergency stop signal is activated when the motor is already stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If an emergency stop signal is activated when the motor is running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency stop through fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prevention of Unexpected Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC magnetising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
47
47
47
48
48
48
50
52
52
53
54
54
55
55
55
56
56
56
57
58
59
60
60
60
60
60
61
62
62
63
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
65
65
65
66
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
Constant DC magnetising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flux optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oscillation damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low speed fine tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor control, DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IR compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hexagonal motor flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel-connected inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced run function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a broken inverter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current measurement calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor temperature protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor thermal mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
68
68
69
69
69
69
69
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
73
74
74
75
75
75
75
76
76
76
77
79
79
79
79
80
80
80
81
81
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
83
83
83
83
84
84
84
Table of contents
Temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal sensor connection through I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal connection through analogue I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O configuration example 1 with motor temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O configuration example 2 with motor temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative thermal connection for PTC thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short time overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum current load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stall protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth fault and current unbalance protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master/Follower link communication fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed measurement fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preprogrammed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
85
86
86
86
87
87
87
88
88
89
89
89
90
90
90
90
90
90
91
91
91
92
92
92
92
92
92
93
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
94
94
95
95
95
95
95
96
96
96
96
97
97
97
97
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Run disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Control board temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
I/O monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Overswitching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
System fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Adaptive programming with DriveAP 2.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Master/Follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Diagnostics and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Master drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Follower drive(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Data transfer from follower(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Load share function with speed controlled Follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Process master on-line configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Master/Follower link specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Inverter fan speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
LSU communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Sine filter support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Inverter charging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Monitoring panel NLMD-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pulse encoder, RTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Position counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table of contents
10
119
120
120
120
120
120
121
121
121
121
121
121
122
122
123
123
123
123
124
Table of contents
127
127
127
128
128
129
131
133
136
137
141
143
145
146
153
165
169
169
171
173
176
178
178
179
180
182
185
186
11
24 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25 TORQUE REF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 TORQUE REF HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27 FLUX CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28 MOTOR MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 SCALAR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 BRAKE CHOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35 MOTOR FAN CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36 MOTOR CABLE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50 SPEED MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51 MASTER ADAPTER (fieldbus adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53 USER PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55 ADAPTIVE PROG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56 ADAPT PROG1 CNTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57 ADAPTIVE PROG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58 ADAPT PROG2 CNTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66 AP CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71 DRIVEBUS COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95 LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97 DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
198
199
201
202
205
207
217
217
218
219
219
222
222
223
223
225
226
227
228
229
234
234
235
236
237
238
240
240
246
Fault tracing
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms by number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faults by number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
253
253
253
253
254
255
262
263
264
277
Application macros
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Table of contents
12
281
281
282
282
283
283
285
286
287
289
289
289
289
290
291
292
293
295
Table of contents
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
308
309
13
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS800 System Control Program version
AMXR7230 and later. See signal 04.01 SW PACKAGE VER.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use
the drive. For single drive the complete safety instructions are given at the
beginning of the hardware manual. For multidrive safety instructions, see
ACS800 Multidrive Safety Instructions [3AFE64760432 (English)].
Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the
default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are
given in this manual in the section describing the related user-adjustable
parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring
practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
14
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters:
Start-up instructs in setting up the application program.
Control panel gives instructions for using the panel.
Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the
user settings and diagnostic signals.
Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the
drive.
Fault tracing lists the alarm and fault messages with the possible causes and
remedies.
Application macros contains a short description of each macro.
Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication
link.
Control block diagrams contains control block diagrams.
Terms lists the terms and abbreviation used in this manual.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select
Drives Training courses.
15
Start-up
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the basic start-up procedure of the drive.
Start-up
16
Safety
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the safety
instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual or for multidrive,
see ACS800 Multidrive Safety Instructions [3AFE64760432 (English)].
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if
- there is a risk of damage in case of an incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID run is essential only
in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
Connect fibre optic cables between DDCS channel CH3 (of the RDCO-0x module) and the
NDPC cable adapter connected to PCMCIA card in the PC.
Disconnect the external control system from channel CH0 of the RDCO-0x module or from
the fieldbus adapter module type Rxxx connected to Slot 1 of the RMIO board.
Power up
Switch the power on.
Start the DriveWindow program.
Switch the drive to local control mode.
Motor data entering
Open the parameter list (Parameters) from the DriveWindow menu.
Select the language.
Double-click the DriveWindow Parameters window to upload
parameters and signals.
99.01 LANGUAGE
Start-up
17
ABB Motors
3
motor
V
690 Y
400 D
660 Y
380 D
415 D
440 D
Cat. no
6312/C3
6210/C3
380 V
mains
voltage
180
IEC 34-1
Range: 8300 Hz
With multimotor drives, see section Multimotor drives on page 17.
After the motor parameters have been set, alarm ID MAGN REQ is
displayed.
** ALARM **
ID MAGN REQ
Multimotor drives
i.e. more than one motor is connected to one drive
Note: Scalar control mode is recommended with multimotor drives
1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors,
2) if the motors are of different sizes, or
3) if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification.
Start-up
18
Check that the motors have the same relative slip, nominal voltage
and number of poles. If the manufacturer motor data is insufficient,
use the following formulas to calculate the slip and the number of
poles:
fN 60 *
p = Int -----------------
nN
n
f 60
N
= ---------------p
n S nN
s = --------------------- 100%
n
S
where
p = number of pole pairs (= motor pole number / 2)
fN = motor nominal frequency [Hz]
nN = motor nominal speed [rpm]
s = motor slip [%]
nS = motor synchronous speed [rpm].
Set the sum of the motor nominal currents.
Set the nominal motor frequencies. Frequencies must be the same. 99.04 MOTOR NOM FREQ
Note: If scalar control is used (parameter 99.08 MOTOR CTRL
MODE = SCALAR), this setting does not apply.
Set the sum of the motor nominal powers.
If the motor powers are close to each other or the same but the
nominal speeds vary slightly, parameter 99.05 MOTOR NOM
SPEED can be set to an average value of the motor speeds.
Optional modules
Activate all optional modules connected to the RDCO-0x module.
Select the connection interface and operation mode for the
modules.
Parameter group 98
OPTION MODULES
I/O communication
Check the possible I/O signal selections.
Parameter groups
10 DIGITAL INPUTS...
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Run interlock
If RUN INTERLOCK function is needed (prevents motor start):
Program the interlocking with adaptive programming.
See ACS600 / ACS800 Application Guide Adaptive Program for
System Application Program 7.x [3AFE68420075 (English)].
Start-up
19
Optional DC switch
Activate the fuse switch control if R7i/R8i inverter is equipped with
a DC switch or if R7i inverter includes charging option +F272.
Start-up
20
Speed measurement
with pulse encoder
Check the speed scaling of the motor.
** ALARM **
ID MAGN REQ
ID MAGN
ID DONE
Start-up
21
** ALARM **
ID MAGN
ID MAGN
ID DONE
Start-up
22
forward
direction
reverse
direction
Start-up
23
ID RUN
ID DONE
Start function
21.01 START FUNCTION
Select the start function.
The fastest start is achieved when parameter 21.01 START
FUNCTION is set to AUTO (flying start).
The highest possible starting torque is achieved when parameter
21.01 START FUNCTION is set to DC MAGN (DC magnetising) or
CNST DC MAGN (constant DC magnetising).
Note: When parameter 21.01 START FUNCTION setting is
DC MAGN or CNST DC MAGN, flying start (start to a rotating motor)
is not possible.
If there is a starting problem at zero speed with AUTO mode without 28.12 FLYSTART CUR REF
a pulse encoder, adjust parameters 28.12 FLYSTART CUR REF or 28.13 FLYSTART INIT DLY
28.15 RS20 [mOhm]
28.13 FLYSTART INIT DLY. See also effect of parameter 28.15
RS20 [mOhm] if starting torque is high.
Motor thermal model
Select the motor thermal model protection mode.
Note: DTC mode can only be used with ABB motors when the
nominal motor current IN < 800 A.
Start-up
24
Unit
Pt100
PTC
normal 0...1.5 k
overtemperature > 4 k
KTY84-1xx
90 C = 936
110 C = 1063
130 C = 1197
150 C = 1340
Scaling
Start-up
25
24.01 PI TUNE
Optimise the P-part of the speed controller: Set the integration time
to its maximum value to change the PI (proportional integral)
controller into a P controller:
24.09 TIS
Give a step change up, for example 20 rpm. When the speed is
stabilised, give a step change down, for example -20 rpm.
24.03 KPS
01.04 MOTOR
SPEED
KPS optimal
Start-up
26
24.09 TIS
01.04 MOTOR
SPEED
TIS too long
TIS optimal
Start-up
27
Speed filtering
The measured speed always has a small ripple because of mechanical interference and couplings.
A small ripple is acceptable as long as it does not affect the speed control chain. Reducing the
ripple with filters may cause speed controller tuning problems. A long filter time constant and fast
acceleration time contradict one other.
If the speed measurement shows rapid oscillation, it can be filtered
with a speed error filter:
- Set the speed error filter time constant.
- Set the time constant of the first order actual speed filter.
If there is no gear box and no pulse encoder feedback and if fast
oscillation is observed:
- Decrease the time constant of the first order actual speed filter to
its minimum.
See control block diagrams in sections Speed measurement on
page 302 and Scalar control on page 309.
If there is a substantial backlash in the drive, and the drive oscillates 24.04 KPSMIN
24.05 KPS WEAKPOINT
at low torque due to the mechanism:
24.06 KPS WP FILT TIME
- Set the adaptive speed control parameters.
If the adaptability has to be made abrupt (i.e. par. 24.03 KPS value
is high, and par. 24.04 value is low) the drive can start to oscillate as
the load varies. Use a speed step to test the adaptability (for
example 50 rpm). See section Manual speed controller tuning on
page 25.
If mechanical oscillation at a certain frequency is observed (narrow
frequency band), reduce oscillation:
See section Oscillation damping on page 72.
26.04 OSC
COMPENSATION
26.05 OSCILLATION FREQ
26.06 OSCILLATION
PHASE
26.08 OSCILLATION GAIN
Start-up
28
When IR compensation is activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low
speeds. IR compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque or in
applications where the motor must rotate slowly, i.e. at a low frequency.
Set the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR
compensation).
Value can be set to 0...30% of the motor nominal voltage. Select
a value at which the motor is able to start and run at constant speed
over the whole speed range.
U/UN
(%)
29.04 IR COMPENSATION
100%
15%
f (Hz)
Start-up
29
Select the topology of the channel CH3 link. Default value STAR is
typically used with branching units. RING is used when the CH3
channels of the RMIO boards are connected in a ring.
70.20 CH3 HW
CONNECTION
Parameter group 10
DIGITAL INPUTS
10.07 HAND/AUTO
Voltage control
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically
decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit.
To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit, the overvoltage controller
automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached.
Activate the undervoltage and overvoltage controllers.
30.22 UNDERVOLTAGE
CTL
30.23 OVERVOLTAGE CTL
Start-up
30
Select the data to be sent from the Master drive to the Follower.
Example: Speed and torque references are sent from the Master
drive to the Follower drive:
Master drive par. 70.10 = 2301 (23.01 SPEED REF).
Master drive par. 70.11 = 210 (02.10 TORQ REF 3).
Speed reference source:
Follower drive par. 70.17 = MASTER (or controlled by 07.03 AUX
CTRL WORD 2 bits 6 and 7).
Torque reference source:
Follower drive par. 70.18 = MASTER (or controlled by 07.03 AUX
CTRL WORD 2 bits 6 and 8).
Note: If parameter 70.08 CH2 M/F MODE is set to FOLLOWER,
parameter 70.10 MASTER SIGNAL 2 and 70.11 MASTER
SIGNAL 3 settings are not effective.
Test the load sharing in practice by changing the load share value
(within allowed range of the drive application) while the system is
running.
Start-up
31
If required start torque is not achieved, i.e. motor will not start to
rotate, decrease the stator resistance of the motor model.
Start-up
32
Start-up
33
Control panel
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312R. The control panel is
used to control the drive(s), read status data, and adjust parameters. The drive is
programmable through a set of parameters.
The communication between the CDP 312R control panel and the drive uses the
Modbus protocol. Modbus is a common bus protocol for ABB Drives products. The
communication speed of the bus is 9600 bit/s. 31 drives and one panel can be
connected to the bus. Each station must have a unique ID number.
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
ENTER
LOC
RESET
REF
REM
0
5
Use
Start
Stop
Fault reset
Control panel
34
Identification display
When the control panel is connected to the panel link for the first time, or when the
drive is powered up, the identification display shows the panel software version:
CDP312 PANEL V5.30
After the Identification Display, the panel enters the Drive Selection Mode and
displays the inverter type:
ACS 800
0005_3 SR
ID NUMBER
After two seconds, the display will clear, and the Actual Signal Display Mode will
appear.
Note: The panel can be connected to the drive while power is applied to the drive.
Control panel
35
ACT
1 L ->
LED PANEL
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Status row
Actual signal names
and values
ENTER
Parameter Mode
Group selection
Fast value change
PAR
Parameter selection
Slow value change
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
Status row
Parameter group
Parameter
Parameter value
ENTER
Function Mode
FUNC
Row selection
Page selection
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
Status row
List of functions
Function start
ENTER
Drive Selection Mode
Drive selection
ID number change
DRIVE
ENTER
ACS 800
0005_3
DRYER SECTION 1
AMAM15D3 980605
ID NUMBER 1
Device type
SW version / application
version and ID number
Status row
The figure below describes the status row digits.
Drive ID number
Drive control status
L = Local control
= External control
1 L ->
1242.0 rpm I
Direction of rotation
-> = Forward
<- = Reverse
Drive reference
Drive status
I = Running
O = Stopped
= Run disabled
Control panel
36
Action
1.
Press Key
ACT
PAR
FUNC
2.
LOC
REM
Display
1
->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
3.
To stop.
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
4.
To start.
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm I
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
5.
1 L <LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
6.
Control panel
37
Action
Press Key
1.
ACT
PAR
FUNC
2.
3.
4.
LOC
REM
REF
(fast change)
To save the reference.
(The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is
restored automatically after power switch-off.)
1
-> 1242.0 rpm 0
LED PANE
0 %
MOTOR SP
0.0 rpm
MOTOR TO
0.00 %
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm 0
LED PANE
0 %
MOTOR SP
0.0 rpm
MOTOR TO
0.00 %
1 L -> [1242.0 rpm] 0
LED PANE
0 %
MOTOR SP
0.0 rpm
MOTOR TO
0.00 %
1 L -> [1325.0 rpm] 0
LED PANE
0 %
MOTOR SP
0.0 rpm
MOTOR TO
0.00 %
(slow change)
5.
Display
ENTER
Control panel
38
Action
1.
Press key
ACT
2.
3.
4.
ENTER
6.
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L ->
0.0 rpm 0
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01 MOTOR SPEED FILT
0.0 rpm
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
2 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01 SPEED REF 2
0 rpm
5.
Display
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
1 L ->
LED PANE
SPEED RE
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Action
Press key
Display
1.
Hold
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
LED PANEL OUTP
MOTOR SPEED FILT
MOTOR TORQUE FILT
ACT
2.
Release
ACT
Control panel
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
39
Action
1.
Press key
ACT
2.
4.
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
2 LAST FAULT
+ PANEL LOSS
20 H 49 MIN 56 S
The time of occurrence can be seen either as total poweron time or in the date format if an external control system
(for example AC 80, AC 800M) has been connected to
control the drive.
3.
Display
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
2 LAST FAULT
H
MIN
S
RESET
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
2 LAST FAULT
+ OVERCURRENT
12 H 49 MIN 10 S
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Action
1.
Press Key
ACT
2.
RESET
Display
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
ACS 800
75 kW
*** FAULT ***
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Control panel
40
Event
Information on display
Name and
code
Sequential number
(1 is the most recent event)
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
2 LAST FAULT
+ OVERCURRENT
12 H 49 MIN 10 S
Poweron time
Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can:
view parameter values
change parameter settings.
The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key.
Note: Certain parameters do not allow changes. If tried, no change is accepted, and
the following warning is displayed:
**WARNING**
WRITE ACCESS DENIED
PARAMETER SETTING
NOT POSSIBLE
Control panel
41
Action
1.
Press key
Display
PAR
2.
To select a group.
When the arrow button is pressed down, only the
parameter group name is displayed. When the button is
released also the first parameter of the group is displayed.
3.
4.
5.
ENTER
6b.
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
01 AI1 HIGH VALUE
10000
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
10 DIGITAL INPUTS
01 START/STOP
NO
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
10 DIGITAL INPUTS
02 DIRECTION
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
10 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DIRECTION
[FORWARD]
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
10 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DIRECTION
[DI3]
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
10 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DIRECTION
DI3
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
10 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
02 DIRECTION
FORWARD
Control panel
42
Action
Press Key
1.
Display
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
55 ADAPTIVE PROG1
06 INPUT1
[000.000.00]
ENTER
2.
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
55 ADAPTIVE PROG1
06 INPUT1
[000.000.00]
3.
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
55 ADAPTIVE PROG1
06 INPUT1
[000.018.00]
4.
ENTER
1)
1 L ->
0.0 rpm
55 ADAPTIVE PROG1
06 INPUT1
[001.018.00]
Inversion field
Group field
Index field
Bit field
Control panel
43
Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can:
Upload group 10...98 parameter values from the drive to the panel.
Download group 10...97 parameter values from the panel to the drive.1)
Copy group 10...97 parameter values from one drive to another by using the
upload and download functions.
Adjust the contrast of the display.
The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key.
The upload function can be performed also when the drive is running. During upload,
only a STOP command can be given to the drive.
The download function can only be performed, when the drive is stopped.
1)
The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included.
Control panel
44
Step
Action
1.
Press Key
FUNC
Display
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
2.
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
3.
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
4.
0.0 rpm
<=<=
5.
1
->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
6.
7.
8.
9.
ENTER
LOC
REM
LOC
REM
1 L ->
UPLOAD
10.
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
11.
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
12.
1 L ->
DOWNLOAD
0.0 rpm
=>=>
Control panel
ENTER
45
Action
Press Key
1.
Display
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
2.
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
3.
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
0
4.
1 L ->
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
[0]
5.
6.a
6.b
ENTER
ENTER
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
1 L ->
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm O
[7]
1 L ->
UPLOAD
DOWNLOAD
CONTRAST
0.0 rpm
<=<=
=>=>
7
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Control panel
46
Action
Press key
1.
Display
DRIVE
2.
3.
ACS800
0003_3 SR
DRIVE NAME
AMXR7200
ID NUMBER 1
ACS800
DRIVE NAME
1o
0003_3 SR
AMXR7200
ID NUMBER 1
PAR
FUNC
1 L ->
LED PANE
MOTOR SP
MOTOR TO
0.0 rpm 0
0 %
0.0 rpm
0.00 %
Boolean
Hex
Control panel
Bit 0
47
Program features
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the typical functions of the drive.
ACS800
External control
Standard I/O
Control panel
Fieldbus
adapter
Slot 1
DriveWindow
CH3
(DDCS)
RDCO
module
CH0
(DDCS)
Fieldbus adapter
Nxxx
or
Advant controller
(e.g. AC 80, AC 800M)
CH1
(DDCS)
AIMA-01 I/O
adapter module
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO
module
Control modes
The System Application Program has two main control modes: remote (external
control) and local (local control). The control mode is selected with the LOC/REM
key on the CDP 312R control panel or with the DriveWindow PC tool.
Program features
48
External control
When the drive is in external control, commands are given through a serial link
(connected to option module in Slot 1/2 of the drive or to DDCS channel CH0 of the
RDCO module) or the I/O terminals (digital and analogue inputs). The desired
alternative is selected by parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE.
A HAND/AUTO function is suitable for applications requiring alternation between
serial communication control and I/O control. A digital input can be selected for
changing the control location. The function is activated by parameter
10.07 HAND/AUTO.
It is possible to use two serial communication interfaces with one drive. See section
Redundant fieldbus control on page 282.
I/O extension modules are connected to option Slot 1/2 of the drive or to DDCS
channel CH0 of the RDCO module. All I/O extension units connected to DDCS
channel CH1 are connected in ring topology. Channel CH1 acts as a master in the
communication link.The RMIO is the actual master of the communication link. Each
I/O unit has an individual address, set with DIP switches on the unit. Before use,
each I/O unit must be activated by parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.
External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display.
->1242 rpm
Local control
When the drive is in local control, the control commands are given from the control
panel keypad or from a PC equipped with DriveWindow. When control panel is used,
L indicates local control on the panel display.
1 L ->1242 rpm
Local control mode is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The
control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local
mode. Changing the control location to local can be disabled by parameter
16.04 LOCAL LOCK.
In local control, the emergency stop activation signal source can be selected by
parameter 21.12 LOCAL EM STOP MODE.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
10.07 HAND/AUTO
21.12 LOCAL EM STOP MODE Selection of the source for the emergency stop activation signal in
local control mode
98 OPTION MODULES
Program features
49
The following diagram presents the external control interface and I/O connections.
Fieldbus
adapter
Rxxx (e.g.
RPBA-01
RDNA-01
RMIO
Slot 1
or
RDIO-01
1) Installed
or
or
in Slot 1 or Slot 2
1)
RMBA-01
RDIO-01
Slot 2
RDCO-0x
- Fieldbus
- ABB controllers
or
or
2) Recommended
to be
connected to AIMA-01
RTAC-01 2)
or
RMBA-011)
or
with
RDCO-01, 10 MBd
CH1
AC80 (4
CI858
ModuleBus
AC 800M (4
AC 800M (4
NTAC-02
Node addr.
= 16
CH1 1A
Slot 1
AIMA-01
Slot 2
CH1 1A
Slot 3
RDIO/RAIO/RTAC
- Master/Follower link
or
or
Fieldbus
adapter Nxxx
(used with
RDCO-02
4) Used
- I/O extensions
- Pulse encoder
RAIO-01
RTAC-01 2)
RAIO-01
Slot 1
AIMA-01
Slot 2
ISU
DSU
(single drive
interface)
Slot 3
RDIO/RAIO/RTAC
0...2 AIMA-01 adapters according to the
number of RDIO, RAIO and RTAC modules
CH2
Broadcast
- PC tools
- NETA-0x
CH3
CH0/CH2
RDCO-0x
CH0/CH2
RDCO-0x
CH0/CH2
RDCO-0x
CH0/CH2
RDCO-0x
ACS800
Follower 1
ACS800
Follower 2
ACS800
Follower 3
ACS800
Follower 4
NDBU
-85/95
NDBU
-85/95
CH0
MSTR
CH0
CH1
ACS800
drives
ACS800
MSTR
CH2
CH1
CH3
...
CH8
CH2
ACS800
drives
CH3
...
CH8
NETA-01
DDCS/PC card
cable
or
NDPC-12
PCMCIA
board and
NDPA-02
Laptop
PC
or
PCMCIA
board and
NDPA-02
PCI
adapter
Desktop
PC
Program features
50
Analogue inputs
The drive has three programmable non-galvanically isolated analogue inputs on
the RMIO board: one voltage input (0/2...10 V or -10...10 V) and two current inputs
(0/4...20 mA). The accuracy of the analogue inputs is +/-0.5% and the update cycle
is 10 ms.
Two extension inputs are available if an optional Analogue I/O Extension 1 module,
RAIO, is used. The input signal range is selected with DIP switches. The hardware
filter time constant of the RMIO analogue inputs is approximately 1 ms.
For more information, see RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension User's Manual
[3AFE64484567 (English)].
Each input can be filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted.
Analogue inputs can be used
for motor temperature measurement
as I/O speed or torque reference source
as a communication interface for an external control system (e.g. fieldbus control)
in adaptive programming using function blocks.
Analogue input speed reference can be summed with the fieldbus adapter speed
reference if parameter 11.02 AI+FBA SPEED REF is activated and parameter
98.02 COMM. MODULE is set to FIELDBUS.
See control block diagram in section I/O speed and torque references and motor
temperature protection on page 301.
Two extra inputs are also available for adaptive block programming if an optional
Analogue I/O Extension 2 module, RAIO, is used. (See blocks EXT2_AI1...2 in the
ACS600 / ACS800 Application Guide Adaptive Program for System Application
Program 7.x [3AFE68420075 (English)].)
Program features
51
RMIO board
AI
AI1
(1
Input type
Resolution
Signal
Additional information
0...+/-10
V DC
11 bits
+ sign
MOTOR 1 TEMP
or
I/O speed reference
11 bits
+ sign
11 bits
+ sign
Ri = 200 k
AI2
0/4...20 mA
Ri = 100
AI3
0/4...20 mA
Ri = 100
Input type
Resolution
Signal
Additional information
AI1
0(4)...20 mA
Ri = 100
12 bits
MOTOR 1 TEMP
0...2 V DC
0...10 V DC
Ri > 200
12 bits
or
I/O speed reference
0(4)...20 mA
Ri > 100
12 bits
MOTOR 2 TEMP
0...2 V DC
0...10 V DC
Ri > 200
12 bits
or
Torque reference for I/O control.
I/O torque reference B Isolated from analogue outputs, power supply and earth.
Test voltage: 1.5 kV AC, 1 minute.
AI2
Input type
Signal
Additional information
AI1
-20...+20 mA 11 bits
0(4)...20 mA + sign
Ri = 100
MOTOR 1 TEMP
-2...+2 V DC 11 bits
-10...10 V DC + sign
Ri = 200 k
or
I/O speed reference
-20...+20 mA 11 bits
0(4)...20 mA + sign
Ri = 100
MOTOR 2 TEMP
-2...+2 V DC 11 bits
-10...10 V DC + sign
Ri = 200 k
or
Torque reference for I/O control.
I/O torque reference B Isolated from analogue outputs, power supply and earth.
Test voltage: 1.5 kV AC, 1 minute.
AI2
Resolution
(1 If
analogue input AI1 has been selected for speed reference and motor temperature measurement, motor temperature
measurement is valid and the speed reference is switched to zero and alarm I/O SP REF is activated (see chapter Fault
tracing).
(2
Unipolar mode is selected by setting parameter 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1 (with analogue I/O extension module 1) or
by setting parameters 98.13 AI1 EXT2 MODE and 98.14 AI2 EXT2 MODE (with analogue I/O extension module 2).
(3
With bipolar speed reference signal, the speed scaling is defined by parameters 13.01/13.04 AI1/2 HIGH VALUE and
13.02/13.05 AI1/2 LOW VALUE. See also parameter 13.12/13.06 MINIMUM AI1/2.
Program features
52
Example:
-10...+10 V bipolar speed reference signal:
Set parameter 13.01 AI1 HIGH VALUE to 20000 and 13.02 AI1 LOW VALUE to
-20000.
Select -10 V by parameter 13.12 MINIMUM AI1.
Set speed scaling: Parameter 50.01 SPEED SCALING defines the speed
reference in rpm which corresponds to value 20000.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
10.07 HAND/AUTO
11 REFERENCE SELECT
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
98 OPTION MODULES
Diagnostics
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
01.19...01.21
53
Analogue outputs
The drive has two programmable non-galvanically isolated current outputs
(0/4...20 mA) on the RMIO board. Two outputs can be added by using an optional
Analogue I/O Extension module, RAIO. For more information, see RAIO-01
Analogue I/O Extension User's Manual [3AFE64484567 (English)].
Analogue output signals can be inverted and filtered. The analogue output signals
can be proportional to motor speed, process speed (scaled motor speed), output
frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power, etc. It is possible to write
a value to an analogue output through a serial communication link (e.g. fieldbus
link).
The resolution of the RMIO board analogue outputs is 10 bits and the accuracy is
+/-1%. The resolution of the RAIO module analogue outputs is 12 bits and the
accuracy is +/-0.5%.
The analogue output update cycle is 10 ms.
Two extra outputs are also available for adaptive block programming if an optional
Analogue I/O Extension 2 module, RAIO, is used.
RMIO board
AO
Input type
Resolution Signal
Additional information
AO1 0(4)...20 mA
Ri =
max. 700
12 bits
AO2 0(4)...20 mA
Ri =
max. 700
12 bits
RAIO module
AO
Input type
AO3 0(4)...20 mA
Ri =
max. 700
Resolution Signal
12 bits
12 bits
AO4 0(4)...20 mA
Ri =
max. 700
(isolated from
the power
supply)
Additional information
Program features
54
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
98 OPTION MODULES
Diagnostics
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
55
Digital inputs
The drive has seven digital inputs on the RMIO board. Digital input DI1 is reserved
for the emergency stop signal and digital input DI2 is reserved for the run enable
signal. Digital inputs DI3...DI7 are freely programmable. Six inputs can be added by
using optional Digital I/O Extension modules, RDIOs. RDIO modules can also be
used to replace the RMIO board digital inputs. For more information, see RDIO-01
Digital I/O Extension User's Manual [3AFE64485733 (English)].
All digital inputs can be read through a serial communication link (e.g. fieldbus link).
The maximum number of digital inputs is 13.
DI
RMIO board
I/O name
in software
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 Ext1 Ext1 Ext1 Ext2 Ext2 Ext2
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI1 DI2 DI3
DI1
DI2
2
1
DI3
2
1
DI4
3
1
DI6
1: Par. 98.03 1)
and Par. 98.04
= NO
2
1
DI5
DI7(DIIL)
3
1
2)
EXT1 DI1
3
1
EXT1 D12
EXT1 DI3
EXT2 DI2
EXT2 DI3
3)
3: Par. 98.04 =
REPLACE
6: Par. 98.04 =
EXTEND or
STEP-UP
EXT2 DI1 3)
2: Par. 98.03 1)
= REPLACE
5: Par. 98.03 1)
= EXTEND
3)
Par. setting
6
6
6
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1: NO = No RDIO module 1 used, REPLACE = RDIO replaces RMIO
DI1, DI2, DI3.
2) D17 is a normal input, which is not connected to interlock circuit.
3) See parameter group 10 DIGITAL INPUTS.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
10 DIGITAL INPUTS
98 OPTION MODULES
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Program features
56
Digital outputs
The drive has three programmable digital outputs on the RMIO board. Four outputs
can be added by using optional Digital I/O Extension modules, RDIOs. RDIO
modules can also be used to replace the RMIO board digital outputs. For more
information, see RDIO-01 Digital I/O Extension User's Manual [3AFE64485733
(English)].
The maximum number of digital outputs is 7.
It is possible to write a value to a digital output through a serial communication link
(e.g. fieldbus link).
DO
RMIO board
RDIO
module 1
I/O name
in software
DO1
DO2
Ext1
DO2
RDIO
module 2
Ext2
DO1
Ext2
DO2
2
1
DO3
EXT1 DO1
EXT1 DO2
EXT2 DO1
EXT2 DO2
2
1
Parameter setting
2, 5
2, 5
6
3, 6
DI/O EXT MODULE 1: NO = No RDIO module 1 used, REPLACE = RDIO replaces RMIO
DO1 and DO2.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
98 OPTION MODULES
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
57
Program features
58
AO1AO1+
If parameter 30.03 =
1...3 PT100 or PTC
rpm
X20
1
2
X21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X23
1
2
X25
1
2
3
X26
1
2
3
X27
1
2
3
Program features
VREF
GND
VREF
GND
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2AI3+
AI3AO1+
AO1AO2+
AO2-
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
+24 V
+24 V
DGND1
DGND2
DI7(DIIL)
No Emergency Stop
Run Enabled
By default not in use
By default not in use
By default not in use
By default not in use
+24 V DC, max. 100 mA
+24 V
GND
Digital ground
Digital ground
By default not in use
Auxiliary voltage input or output 24 V DC, 250
mA or 130 mA if an NLMD-01 panel is
included.
RO11
RO12
RO13
Relay output 1
RO21
RO22
RO23
Relay output 2
RO31
RO32
RO33
Relay output 3
Running (default)
Fault (default)
59
Motor temperature
measurement 1...3
Pt100, PTC or
KTY84-1xx
AI1+
AI1-
AO1AO1+
mA-type of alternative
for references
%
If parameter 30.03 =
1...3 PT100 or PTC
rpm
1)
X20
1
2
X21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
X23
1
2
X25
1
2
3
X26
1
2
3
X27
1
2
3
VREF
GND
VREF
GND
AI1+
AI1AI2+
AI2AI3+
AI3AO1+
AO1AO2+
AO2-
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
+24 V
+24 V
DGND1
DGND2
DI7 (DIIL)
No Emergency Stop
Run Enabled
+24 V
GND
1)
1)
Reset
1)
RO11
RO12
RO13
Relay output 1
RO21
RO22
RO23
Relay output 2
RO31
RO32
RO33
Relay output 3
Run (default)
Fault (default)
Program features
60
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
motor speed and torque
intermediate circuit DC voltage
drive temperature
operating time counter (h), kWh counter, fan-on time counter (h) and motor run time
counter (h)
digital I/O and analogue I/O status.
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also
possible to read the values through a serial communication link or through analogue
outputs.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
92 D SET TR ADDR
93 D SET TR ADDR
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS...
09 FAULT WORDS
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model
determined during the motor start-up. A motor Identification Magnetisation is
automatically done the first time the start command is given. During this first start-up,
called ID MAGN, the motor is magnetised at zero speed for several seconds to allow
the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most
applications. In demanding applications, a separate identification run can be
performed.
Settings
Program features
Parameter
Additional information
61
Undervoltage control
If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilising
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the
operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Undervoltage control limit is 0.82 1.35 U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of
the input voltage range.
See control block diagram in section Torque reference on page 306.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option must be
equipped with a hold circuit (e.g. UPS) which keeps the contactor control circuit
closed during a short supply break.
fout UDC
TM
(Nm) (Hz) (V DC)
160
80
520
120
60
390
80
40
260
40
20
130
Umains
UDC
fout
TM
1.6
4.8
8
11.2
14.4
UDC= intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive,
TM = motor torque
t(s)
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the
minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off. The drive
runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the
motor has enough kinetic energy.
Note: The undervoltage controller is able to adjust the torque in all operating
quadrants without limitations, if the following parameter values are set high enough:
- power limits: 20.17, 20.18,
- torque limits: 20.05, 20.06 and
- maximum current: 20.04.
Program features
62
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Maximum current
Torque limits
20.15 UNDERVOLT TORQ UP and Limitation of the maximum/minimum torque during undervoltage
20.16 UNDERVOLT TORQ DN
control, when adaptive UDC measurement is deactivated.
20.17 P MOTORING LIM and
20.18 P GENERATING LIM
Power limits
Diagnostics
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
DC undervoltage limit
63
Overvoltage control
Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is needed with two-quadrant
line-side converters when the motor operates within the generating quadrant.
To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit, the
overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit
is reached.
The overvoltage control limit is 1.24 1.35 U1max, where U1max is the maximum
value of the input voltage range.
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
DC overvoltage limit
Automatic start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds,
the starting is immediate under all conditions. For example the starting of turbining
pumps or windmilling fans is easy.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Program features
64
Auto restart
It is possible to restart the drive automatically after a short power supply failure (max.
5 seconds) using the AUTO RESTART function if
- the RMIO board is powered through an UPS (Uninterruptible Power System)
- digital input DI2 circuit remains closed during the power supply failure
- the inverter is allowed to run for max. 5 seconds without inverter fans.
The maximum time for a power failure for the auto restart function is adjustable
(21.10 AUTO RESTART TIME). The factory setting is five seconds.
Note: Check that the auxiliary control circuit functions correctly during a power
supply failure.
When a power supply failure occurs
08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD is frozen and DC UNDERVOLT fault (signal 09.02
Fault Word 2 bit 2) is masked. DC UNDERVOLT fault is internally reset.
DC UNDERVOLT alarm is activated (signal 09.05 Alarm Word 2 bit 14 value is 1).
07.01 MAIN CONTROL WORD bit 0 (ON) changes from 1 to 0 and back to 1.
Start function is forced temporarily to the flying start mode (parameter 21.01
START FUNCTION setting is AUTO).
After a successful restart, alarm RESTARTED is activated (signal 09.05 Alarm
Word 2 bit 15 value is 1).
Note: If the power supply failure lasts over 5 seconds: Auto restart function is
cancelled, 08.01 Main Status Word is restored and DC UNDERVOLT fault (signal
09.02 Fault Word 2 bit 2) is unmasked.
PPCC fault indications can be masked when auto restart function has been selected.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
DC undervoltage fault/alarm
65
Emergency stop
ACS800 hardware and System Application Program fulfil the following emergency
stop category classes:
Class 0 Immediate removal of power
Class 1 Controlled emergency stop.
The emergency stop signal is connected to digital input DI1 of the RMIO board or
DI1 of the RDIO I/O Extension module 1 (Par. 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 setting
must be REPLACE). The function is activated by digital input DI1 or by setting 07.01
Main Control Word bit 2 (OFF3) to 0.
The emergency stop feedback signal is sent through digital output DO1 of the drive
RMIO board (or the RDIO I/O Extension module 1) to the Auxiliary Control Unit,
which contains the control relays for the common emergency stop circuit.
The purpose of the feedback signal is to confirm that the emergency stop function
has been received and the drive program is running. If no feedback is received, the
main AC supply will be switched off after a short delay defined by the Auxiliary
Control Units adjustable relays.
Note: During emergency stop, torque selector parameter 26.01 TORQUE
SELECTOR is internally set to speed control when parameter 21.04 EME STOP
MODE setting is STOP RAMPING or STOP TORQ.
Note: When an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function
cannot be cancelled even though the signal is cancelled.
If an emergency stop signal is activated when the motor is already stopped
- 07.01 Main Control Word bit 2 is set to 0 (= emergency stop), 08.01 Main Status
Word bit 5 is set to 0 (emergency stop active) and 09.04 Alarm Word 1 bit 1 is set
to 1 (= EM STOP alarm). Motor run and motor magnetisation commands are
disabled.
- Relay output RO1 (of the RMIO/RDIO) is energised until 07.01 Main Control Word
bit 0 value is set to 0 (i.e. when the drive is ready to proceed to READY TO SWITCH
ON state).
If an emergency stop signal is activated when the motor is running
- 07.01 Main Control Word bit 2 is set to 0 (= emergency stop), 08.01 Main Status
Word bit 5 is set to 0 (= emergency stop active) and 09.04 Alarm Word 1 bit 1 is set
to 1 (= EM STOP alarm). The drive is stopped according to the emergency stop
mode defined by parameter 21.04 EME STOP MODE.
- Emergency stop function is locked by the application, (i.e. it cannot be cancelled).
Relay output RO1 is energised until the motor has reached zero speed and
07.01 Main Control Word bit 0 value is set to 0. Application program supervises that
the drive deceleration rate is within the window defined by parameters 21.05
EMSTOP DER MIN L and 21.06 EMSTOP DER MAX L. The supervision starts after
the time delay defined by parameter 21.07 EM STOP DEC MON DEL. If the drive is
not able to decelerate the motor within the window, it coasts to stop and 08.02
Auxiliary Status Word bit 2 is set to 1 (= EMERG STOP COAST).
Program features
66
Emergency off
OFF2 (MCW Bit1=0)
OFF_3_STA
(MSW Bit5=0)
OFF2
ACTIVE
OFF_2_STA
(MSW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
ON_INHIBIT
(MSW Bit6=1)
ON (MCW Bit0=0)
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Time delay between the emergency stop signal and the start
of the deceleration monitoring
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
67
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
08.02 AUX STATUS WORD, bit 8 Prevention of Unexpected Start-up activation status
09.04 ALARM WORD 1, bit 0 /
09.06 FAULT WORD 3, bit 5
Program features
68
DC magnetising
When DC magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up
to 200% of the motor nominal torque.
The automatic start feature (section Auto restart on page 64) and DC magnetising
cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Constant DC magnetising
When constant DC magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the
motor for the defined magnetising time before starting. Constant DC magnetising
guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque when the pre-magnetising time is
set long enough. By adjusting the premagnetising time, it is possible to synchronise
the motor start and for example mechanical brake release.
The automatic start feature (section Auto restart on page 64) and DC magnetising
cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Magnetising time
DC hold
By activating the motor DC hold feature it is possible to lock the rotor at zero speed.
When both the reference and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold speed,
the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC into the motor. When the reference
speed again exceeds the DC hold speed, normal drive operation resumes.
Motor
Speed
DC hold
speed
Speed
Reference
DC hold
speed
Program features
DC hold
69
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
17.01 DC HOLD
DC hold speed
DC hold current
Flux braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in
the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor
power ranges below 15 kW.
Motor
speed
No flux braking
Flux braking
t (s)
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during flux braking.
Therefore, flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the
speed. The other benefits of flux braking are:
The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases
during the flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Flux optimisation
Flux optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when
the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive)
can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed.
Note: Flux optimisation limits the dynamic control performance of the drive because
with a small flux reference the drive torque cannot be increased fast.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Program features
70
Program features
71
S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where
a smooth transition is required when changing the speed.
Motor
speed
Linear
S-curve
2 t (s)
Emergency stop ramp time can be defined by parameter 22.04 EME STOP RAMP.
See section Emergency stop on page 65.
Variable slope
When variable slope is activated by parameter 22.06 VARIABLE SLOPE, the slope
of the speed ramp is controlled during a speed reference change.
If the updating time interval for the external control system and the time for the
speed reference change defined by 22.07 VAR SLOPE RATE are equal,
02.02 SPEED REF 3 is a straight line.
This function is active only in the REMOTE control mode.
Speed ref
SPEED REF
t
A
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
22 ACCEL/DECEL
Program features
72
Additional information
07.01 MAIN CTRL WORD, bits 4 and 5 Ramp Function Generator control
07.01 MAIN CTRL WORD, bit 6
Oscillation damping
The oscillation damping function damps mechanical or DC voltage oscillations of the
intermediate circuit. The oscillation source is selected between speed error and DC
voltage by parameter 26.08 OSC COMP INPUT. As an output the oscillation
damping algorithm produces a sine wave. This sine wave can be summed with the
torque reference with a suitable gain and phase.
Tuning procedure of the oscillation damping
Select the input by Par. 26.08 OSC COMP INPUT
Set 26.04 OSC COMPENSATION to ON.
Set 26.07 OSCILLATION GAIN to 0%.
Program features
73
Additional information
Oscillation frequency
Oscillation gain
Speed filtering
The measured speed always has a small ripple because of mechanical interference
and couplings. A small ripple is acceptable as long as it does not affect the speed
control loops. Reducing the ripple with filters may cause tuning problems. A long
filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict each other.
If the speed measurement shows rapid oscillation, it can be filtered with a speed
error filter and by setting the time constant of the first order actual speed filter.
If fast oscillation is observed and the application has no gear box and no pulse
encoder feedback: decrease the time constant of the first order actual speed filter to
its minimum value.
If there is a substantial backlash in the drive, and the drive oscillates at low torque
due to the mechanism, adaptive speed control can be used (parameters 24.05 KPS
WEAKPOINT and 24.06 KPS WP FILT TIME). If the adaptivity has to be made
abrupt, the drive can start to oscillate as the load varies: Use a speed step to test the
adaptivity (for example 50 rpm).
For adaptive speed control as a function of the motor frequency, see parameters
24.17...24.20.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
24.17...24.20
Program features
74
Speed
reference
+
-
Proportional,
integral
Error
value
+ Torque
+ reference
Derivative
Calculated or measured
actual speed
The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically,
1 to 20%).
n
nN
%
A
A: Undercompensated
B: Normally tuned (PI tuning)
C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D: Overcompensated speed controller
Settings
Parameter
Program features
Additional information
24.01 PI TUNE
24.09 TIS
24.03 KPS
75
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Additional information
Run interlock
Drive run can be prevented by the run interlock function. If the function is active,
motor start is prevented or motor is stopped if it was already running.
Note: Run interlock does not reset the start request.
Run interlock can be controlled either digital input DI2 by parameter 16.01 RUN
ENABLE = INTERLOCK or by adaptive programming.
Example: Run interlock is activated by digital input DI3:
Program features
76
8.05.2
X22:3
-8.05.2
BLOCK 1
SWITCH-B
ACT
C1
NO
C0
NC
BLOCK 2
WR-I
C16
GROUP
C14
INDEX
57.09
+57.09
INPUT
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Program features
77
The DTC can only be applied by using high speed signal processing technology.
Digital signal processors are used in ACS800.
Note: In demanding applications a separate identification run is to be performed to
achieve the best motor control accuracy with DTC. See section ID RUN (motor
identification run) on page 22.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Program features
Program features
F R E Q U E N C Y
M O T O R S P E E D
S P E E D R E F
F R E Q U E N C Y R E F
9 9 .0 8
M O T O R C T R L M O D E
1 .0 5
1 .0 4
2 3 .0 1
2 9 .0 1
C O N T R O L
M O D E
2 .1 4
F L U X U S E D
2 .1 3
F L U X A C T
R E F
T O R Q U E U S E D R E F
1 .0 8
E S T IM A T E a n d
C A L C U L A T E
C A L C U L A T E
A C T U A L V A L U E S
M O T O R M O D E L
2 .1 5
D IR E C T T O R Q U E
a n d F L U X
H Y S T E R E S IS
C O N T R O L
o f th e D ir e c t T o r q u e C o n tr o l m e th o d
S P E E D a n d
F R E Q U E N C Y
C O N T R O L
B lo c k d ia g r a m
O p tim a l
S w itc h in g
C o n tro l
V O L T A G E
C U R R E N T
D C
M O T O R T O R Q U E
C o n tr o l b its
F lu x b its
T o r q b its
A S IC
A C S 8 0 0
3 P H A S E S U P P L Y
78
79
Scalar control
It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of Direct
Torque Control (DTC). In the scalar control mode, the drive is controlled with
a frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control
method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved with scalar control.
It is recommended to activate the scalar control mode in the following special
applications:
Multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if the
motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the
motor identification.
If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive.
If the drive is used without a motor connected (for example for test purposes).
If the drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer.
See control block diagram in section Scalar control on page 309.
See also the start-up procedure with scalar control in section Scalar control and IR
compensation on page 27.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
IR compensation
IR compensation is active only when the motor control mode is scalar (see section
Scalar control on page 79). When IR compensation is activated, the drive gives
an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR compensation is useful in
applications that require high breakaway torque or in applications where the motor
must rotate slowly, i.e. at a low frequency. In Direct Torque Control, no IR
compensation is possible/needed.
Motor voltage
Umax
IR compensation
No compensation
f (Hz)
Field weakening point
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
29.04 IR COMPENSATION
Program features
80
Additional information
Parallel-connected inverters
2 to 12 inverters can be connected parallel with branching unit APBU. AINT 1 is
connected to APBU CH1, AINT 2 to CH2 etc.
Inverter block diagram
Upper-leg IGBTs
RMIO
AINT
RMIO
AINT
APBU
Lower-leg IGBTs
U
RMIO
CH3
CH1 CH2
INT
Program features
INT
INT
...
81
Fasten the air baffle provided with the unit to the top module guide to block airflow
through the empty module space.
Disable the charging monitoring of the isolated module, i.e. set switch S1...S3
of the ASFC-01 board to DIS (= disabled).
Switch on the supply voltage. INT COFIG fault (09.06 Fault Word 3 bit 7 value
is 1) now indicates that the number of the connected inverter modules has
changed.
If the operation is continued with limited current, number of existing inverter
modules must be set by parameter 16.10 INT CONFIG USER.
Reset the fault and start the drive. PPCS link is reconfigured automatically and
the maximum current is limited (internally) in relation to the new inverter
configuration and inverter nominal current.
Note: If INT CONFIG fault reappears, the number of parallel-connected inverters
defined by parameter 16.10 INT CONFIG USER is incorrect. See signal 08.22 INT
CONFIG WORD.
Note: When the isolated module is reconnected, set switch S1/S2/S3 of the
ASFC-01 board back to the enabled position.
Program features
82
Note: If all switches S1, S2 and S3 of the ASFC-01 board are set to DIS
(= disabled), the main contactors of the DC switches will not close.
When inverter hardware configuration is changed back to the original, parameter
16.10 INT CONFIG USER value automatically restores back to the original value.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Additional information
Additional information
Diagnostics
Alarm
Program features
Signal
AI<MIN FUNC
Fault
Signal
AI<MIN FUNC
83
Panel loss
Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel or
DriveWindow selected as control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
PANEL LOSS
Fault
Signal
PANEL LOSS
180
15
155
10
130
Hot spot temperature margin
120
80
10
80
105
125
40
40
40
B
130C
F
155C
H
180C
40
Insulation class
Maximum winding temperature
Program features
84
Motor
current 150
(%)
100
Break point
Motor load curve
50
Temp.
rise
100%
63%
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
30.02 MOTOR THERM PROT Selection of the supervision with motor overtemperature
30.09...30.12
30.28...30.29
Ambient temperature
Diagnostics
Program features
Alarm
Signal
MOTOR TEMP
Fault
Signal
MOTOR TEMP
85
Temperature sensors
It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor temperature
sensor to analogue inputs and outputs of the drive.
Analogue output feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor resistance
increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor.
The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analogue input
and converts it to degrees centigrade. The System Application program supports two
measurement channels: AI1 (of the RMIO or RAIO) and AI2 (of the RAIO) for
motor 1 and motor 2 temperature measurements. The constant current level is
automatically set by the application program according to the sensor type selection.
Sensor type
Unit
Pt100
Scaling
PTC
normal 0...1.5 k
overtemperature > 4 k
KTY84-1xx,
(silicon
temperature
sensor)
90 C = 936
110 C = 1063
130 C = 1197
150 C = 1340
Program features
86
One sensor
AI1+
Motor
AI1-
T
AO1+
AO1-
RMIO board
Three sensors
AI1+
Motor
T
AI1T
AO1+
AO1-
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
30.04...30.05
Diagnostics
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
Alarm
Signal
MOTOR TEMP M
T MEAS CIRC
Fault
Signal
MOTOR TEMP M
T MEAS CIRC
87
One sensor
AI1+
Motor
AI1T
AO1+
AO1-
Three sensors
RAIO module
AI1+
Motor
T
AI1T
AO1+
AO1-
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL / Activation of the motor 1/2 temperature measurement function and
30.06 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL selection of the sensor type
30.04...30.05 / 30.07...30.08
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Alarm
Signal
MOTOR TEMP M
T MEAS CIRC
Fault
Signal
MOTOR TEMP M
T MEAS CIRC
Program features
88
RMIO
Motor 1 temperature measurement and
protection
RMIO
AI1
AI2
RMIO +
AO1
1.21 AI3
AI3
PTC /
Pt100 / KTY84-1xx
Parameter
Setting
1xPT100
2xPT100
3xPT100
or
13 PTC or EXT TEMP
RMIO
AI1
AI2
AI3
PTC /
Pt100 / KTY84-1xx
RAIO
+
+
RMIO
signals
for AO
AI1
AI2
Parameter
Setting
1xPT100
2xPT100
3xPT100
or
1...3 PTC
Program features
1.19 AI1
1.20 AI2
TORQUE REF if
1.21 AI3
98.02 = NO or
HAND/AUTO
AO1 AO1
mA
AO2 AO2
mA
RAIO +
AO1
AO2
TEMP MEAS
89
Thermistor
relay*
DI6
+24 V DC
Motor
Alternative 2
DI6
+24 V DC
Motor
Additional information
10.05 KLIXON
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
KLIXON
Fault
Signal
KLIXON
Program features
90
Additional information
Diagnostics
Signal
Additional information
Additional information
Diagnostics
Program features
Alarm
Signal
ACS800 TEMP
Fault
Signal
ACS800 TEMP
91
Stall protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (torque, frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall
condition (alarm indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Stall limit is defined by parameters 20.04 MAXIMUM CURRENT...20.10 TREF
TORQMIN. Torque and current limits must be set according to the maximum load of
the used application.
Note: Stall limit is restricted by internal current limit TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM.
When the application reaches the stall limit and the output frequency of the drive is
below the stall frequency: Fault MOTOR STALL is activated after the stall time delay.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
20.04...20.10
Stall limit
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Alarm
Signal
MOTOR STALL
Fault
Signal
MOTOR STALL
Program features
92
Underload protection
Loss of motor load may indicate process malfunction. The drive provides
an underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault
condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen
as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (alarm
indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
The protection is activated if all the following conditions are fulfilled at the same time:
Motor load is below the underload curve selected by the user.
Motor load has been below the selected underload curve longer than the time set
by the user.
Output frequency of the drive is more than 10% of the motor nominal frequency.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Time limit
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
UNDERLOAD
Fault
Signal
UNDERLOAD
Additional information
Diagnostics
Program features
Fault
Signal
MOTOR PHASE
93
Additional information
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
EARTH FAULT
Fault
Signal
EARTH FAULT
CUR UNBAL x *
Communication fault
The communication fault function supervises the messages received from DDCS
channel CH0 or fieldbus adapter module type Rxxx. The action taken by the drive
upon the communication fault (alarm indication / fault indication & stop the drive) can
be chosen.
Note: If the data update time to data set 10 is less than 2 s (data sets 10...33 are
activated by setting parameter 98.02 to ADVANT-N/FB), both alarm and fault
indications are activated.
Note: When COMM MODULE fault is activated, torque selector (26.01 TORQUE
SELECTOR) is set to speed control.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
70.05 CH0 COM LOSS CTRL Selection of the supervision with communication fault
Program features
94
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
COMM MODULE
Fault
Signal
COMM MODULE
Additional information
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
Fault
Signal
Program features
95
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Alarm
Signal
ENCODER ERR
Fault
Signal
ENCODER ERR
Additional information
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
MOTOR FAN
Fault
Signal
MOTOR FAN
Program features
96
Preprogrammed faults
Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit is 3.5 Ihd, where Ihd is the nominal motor current for
heavy-duty use.
There are two sources for the overcurrent fault:
RMIO software trip level (97% of the measurement range, time level
100 microseconds)
hardware trip level with parallel-connected units (overcurrent is detected by the
APBU board logic).
Note: With parallel-connected inverters the overcurrent fault indication is
OVERCURR x.
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Signal
OVERCURRENT
OVERCURR x *
DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 1.35 U1max, where U1max is the maximum
value of the input voltage range.
Unom of the inverter unit
400 V
500 V
690 V
U1max
415 V
500 V
690 V
Program features
97
Diagnostics
Fault
Signal
DC OVERVOLT
DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.60 1.35 U1min, where U1min is the minimum
value of the input voltage range.
Unom of the inverter unit
400 V
500 V
690 V
U1min
380 V
380 V
525 V
Diagnostics
Fault
Signal
DC UNDERVOLT
Drive temperature
The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. There are two supervision
limits: alarm limit and fault trip limit. These limits are inverter type-specific.
Note: The temperature difference between several parallel-connected inverter
modules is also monitored. If the temperature of one module compared to the
average temperature of the rest of the modules exceeds the limit, alarm/fault is
activated.
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
ACS800 TEMP
TEMP DIF xy *
Fault
Signal
ACS800 TEMP
ACS TEMP xy *
TEMP DIF xy *
Program features
98
Short circuit
Short circuit protection is based on the power semiconductor (IGBT) voltage
measurement (100 microsecond time level). If voltage Uce (collector-emitter voltage)
will not rise within an application-specific time, short circuit fault is activated. This
supervision is active also when no switch-off command has been issued to the IGBT.
The supervision is used for the inverter output circuit protection. If a short circuit
occurs, the drive will not start and a fault is activated.
Diagnostics
Fault
Signal
SHORT CIRC
SC INV xy *
Run disable
To activate the RUN ENABLE signal, a voltage signal must be connected to digital
input DI2. If the voltage drops to 0 V, the drive coasts to stop and fault RUN ENABLE
is generated. The drive will not start before the RUN ENABLE signal is active.
RUN ENABLE signal is also used to control the inverter charging. See section
Inverter charging logic on page 116.
Diagnostics
Fault
Signal
RUN DISABLE
Signal 09.02 Fault Word 2 bit 4 and 08.02 Auxiliary Status Word
bit 4 values are 1.
Overfrequency
If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level (20.11 FREQ TRIP MARGIN),
for example in overshooting of the speed control, the drive is stopped and a fault
indication is given.
Diagnostics
Fault
Signal
OVERFREQ
Program features
Fault
Signal
SUPPLY PHASE
99
Signal
CTRL B TEMP
I/O monitoring
If there is a communication break or signal read error with the RMIO Control board
I/O or with the I/O extension module or I/O extension link, alarm is activated.
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
DIO ALARM
AIO ALARM
Start inhibit
When Prevention of an Unexpected Start-up is activated, the voltage supply of the
AGPS-0x (Gate Driver Power Supply) board is disconnected and
- alarm START INHIBI is generated if the drive was stopped
- fault START INHIBI is generated if the Prevention of Unexpected Start-up is
activated during motor run or if motor start command is given while the Prevention of
Unexpected Start-up is active.
The logging of START INHIBI alarm to the fault/alarm logger can be deactivated by
parameter 31.02 START INHIBIT ALM.
For more information, see Prevention of Unexpected Start-up on page 67.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
START INHIBI
Fault
Signal
START INHIBI
Program features
100
Overswitching frequency
If the inner DTC control loop exceeds the maximum switching frequency, a fault is
generated.
Diagnostics
Fault
Signal
OVER SWFREQ
System fault
If an RMIO board software error causes a communication break, a system fault is
activated.
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Fault
Signal
SYSTEM FAULT
Operation limits
The drive has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum),
power and DC voltage.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
20 LIMITS
Drive limits
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter changes to the flash memory (EPROM) by
activating the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing from the
CDP 312R control panel. From an external control system (e.g. fieldbus control
system) parameter changes to the RAM memory are allowed, even when the lock is
active.
Settings
Program features
Parameter
Additional information
101
Program features
102
Master/Follower
In a Master/Follower application, the system is run by several drives and the motor
shafts are coupled to each other (via gears, chains, belts etc.). The Master drive
controls the Follower drive(s) via a fibre optic link: The Master sends a broadcast
message to the Follower. Its also possible to receive three selectable feedback
signals from maximum three followers via optic link.
Program features
2 3 .0 1
7 0 .0 8
S P E E D R E F
M /F M O D E =
M A S T E R
2 3 .0 1
2 . 01 19
2 . 21 79
M A S T E R
2 . 01 19
P ID
S P E E D
C O N T R O L
M O T O R S P E E D
T O R Q U E R E F A
F O L L T O R Q R E F
= D S T O R Q R E F A
2 5 .0 1
7 0 .1 8
2 .2 0
T O R Q U E R E F 2
2 . 01 9
R E F A
D S 4 1 .3
2 6 .0 1
2 . 1 09
T O R Q U E R E F 3
T O R Q U E S E L E C T O R = 3 ...6
(n o t S P E E D o r Z E R O )
D S T O R Q
7 0 .3 0
T O R Q U E R E F
X
2 . 1 09
T O R Q U E R E F 3
M /F R E F E R E N C E S
D a ta s e t 4 1 .3
S G N 3 S C A L E
S IG N A L 3
2 6 .0 1
T O R Q U E S E L E C T O R = S P E E D
P R IN C IP L E : T O R Q U E C O N T R O L L E D F O L L O W E R
2 4 .0 2
2 .3 0
D S 4 1 .2
R E F
D S M C W
2 . 21 9
S G N 3 S C A L E
F O L L O W E R
L O A D S H A R E
A P P L IC A T IO N
D R O O P R A T E
= 0
F O L L S P D C O R R O U T
S P E E D
R E F 2
- F O L L O W E R
2 . 21 79
U S E D
S P E E D
R E F
7 .0 3 b 9
F O L L S P D C O R R E N A = F A L S E
2 5 .0 3
2 3 .1 8
S H A R E
2 .1 9
D S S P E E D
D S 4 1 . 12
M A S T E R
M A S T E R
7 0 .1 1
T O R Q U E
R E F A
2 5 .0 1
T O R Q U E R E F 2
2 . 01 9
7 0 .3 1
M /F R E F E R E N C E S
D a ta s e t 4 1 .2
P ID
S P E E D
C O N T R O L
M O T O R S P E E D
S P E E D R E F
S IG N A L 2
2 . 01 29
S P E E D
R E F 3
F O L L O W E R
M A S T E R
7 0 .1 0
F O L L S P D C T R L C O R
L O A D
C O N F IG U R A T IO N
M C W
M /F R E F E R E N C E S
D a ta s e t 4 1 .1
C O N F IG U R A T IO N
S IG N A L 1
F O L L S P E E D
R E F
7 0 .1 7
7 0 .0 8
F O L L O W E R D R IV E
S P E E D R E F
M /F M O D E =
F O L L O W E R
M A S T E R D R IV E
M A S T E R
7 0 .0 9
7 0 .1 7
F O L L S P E E D
R E F
S P E E D
R E F 2
U S E D
S P E E D
R E F
103
Program features
Program features
2 3 .0 1
7 0 .0 8
S P E E D R E F
M /F M O D E =
M A S T E R
2 3 .0 1
M A S T E R
2 . 01 19
2 . 21 79
S H A R E
- F O L L O W E R
7 .0 3 b 9
2 3 .1 8
2 5 .0 3
2 . 01 19
2 .1 9
2 4 .0 2
2 5 .0 1
D S 4 1 .3
2 6 .0 1
2 . 1 09
T O R Q U E R E F 3
F O L L O W E R W IT H L O A D S H A R E F U N C T IO N
R E F
T O R Q U E R E F A
F O L L T O R Q
R E F A
7 0 .3 0
T O R Q U E S E L E C T O R = S P E E D
D S T O R Q
S G N 3 S C A L E
T O R Q U E R E F
X
2 . 1 09
T O R Q U E R E F 3
M /F R E F E R E N C E S
D a ta s e t 4 1 .3
2 6 .0 1
T O R Q U E S E L E C T O R = S P E E D
S IG N A L 3
7 0 .1 8
2 .2 0
T O R Q U E R E F 2
2 . 01 9
C O N T R O L L E D
P ID
S P E E D
C O N T R O L
M O T O R S P E E D
F O L L O W E R
L O A D S H A R E
2 .3 0
D S 4 1 .2
S G N 3 S C A L E
P R IN C IP L E : S P E E D
D R O O P R A T E
= 0
D S M C W
2 . 21 9
D S S P E E D R E F
D S 4 1 . 12
M A S T E R
M A S T E R
7 0 .1 1
T O R Q U E
R E F A
2 5 .0 1
T O R Q U E R E F 2
2 . 01 9
7 0 .3 1
M /F R E F E R E N C E S
D a ta s e t 4 1 .2
P ID
S P E E D
C O N T R O L
M O T O R S P E E D
S P E E D R E F
S IG N A L 2
2 . 01 29
S P E E D
R E F 3
F O L L O W E R
M A S T E R
7 0 .1 0
F O L L S P D C O R R O U T
S P E E D
R E F 2
A P P L IC A T IO N
2 . 21 79
U S E D
S P E E D
R E F
F O L L S P D C O R R E N A = T R U E
F O L L S P D C T R L C O R
L O A D
C O N F IG U R A T IO N
M C W
M /F R E F E R E N C E S
D a ta s e t 4 1 .1
C O N F IG U R A T IO N
S IG N A L 1
F O L L S P E E D
R E F
7 0 .1 7
7 0 .0 8
F O L L O W E R D R IV E
S P E E D R E F
M /F M O D E =
F O L L O W E R
M A S T E R D R IV E
M A S T E R
7 0 .0 9
7 0 .1 7
F O L L S P E E D
R E F
S P E E D
R E F 2
U S E D
S P E E D
R E F
104
A block diagram for speed controlled Follower with load share function:
105
Parameter selection (70.08 CH2 M/F MODE) defines whether the drive is the Master
or the Follower in the communication link. Parameter selection can be changed
on-line through an external control system (e.g. fieldbus control system via 07.03
bits 6, 10 and 11). Typically the speed controlled process master drive is configured
also as the Master of the communication.
The Master station is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow its torque
or speed reference. In general, torque control of the Follower should be used when
the motor shafts of the Master and Follower drives are coupled to each other and no
speed difference between the drives is possible. Pulse encoders are recommended
to be used in all of the torque controlled Followers.
The source for the Follower torque/speed reference is selected by parameter 70.17
FOLL SPEED REF / 70.18 FOLL TORQ REF. The Follower reference can also be
selected through external control by 07.03 Auxiliary Control Word 2 bits 6...8.
The selected bits of MCW sent by master can be used in the followers MCW. The
bits are selected by parameter 70.34 FOLLOWER MCW MASK in the follower. The
other bits of the followers MCW are for example sent by fieldbus.
The load sharing between the Master and the Follower can be adjusted by
a parameter (par. 25.03 LOAD SHARE of the Follower drive).
A Master/Follower link is formed by connecting the DDCS CH2 channels of two or
more drives in a ring or star configuration (NDBU branching unit is required with star
configuration).
Ring configuration:
T = Transmitter; R = Receiver; RMIO = I/O and Control Board
Please note that channels CH0/CH2/CH3 are located on the optional RDCO-0x module.
Master
ACS800
ACS800
RMIO-XX
CH2
T R
RDCO-0X
V17
RDCO-0X
RMIOXX
V18
CH2
T R
V17
RDCO-0X
ACS800
RMIO-XX
V18
V17
V18
CH2
T R
Follower
Follower
Program features
106
Star configuration:
T = Transmitter; R = Receiver; RMIO = I/O and Control Board
Please note that channels CH0/CH2/CH3 are located on the optional RDCO-0x module.
Master
ACS800
RMIO-XX
RDCO-0X
V17
V18
CH2
T R
Follower 1
V17
V18
CH2
T R
RDCO-0X
RMIOXX
...
CH2
T R
RDCO-0X
V17
RMIO-XX
ACS800
MASTER
NDBU
V18
ACS800
Follower n
See control block diagrams in sections Speed reference on page 303 and Torque
reference on page 306.
Program features
107
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
23.07...23.09
Load share (i.e. scaling factor for torque reference 02.28 USED
TORQ REF)
Additional information
03.3303.42
Master drive
The torque reference source address is defined in the Master drive by parameter
70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 to be sent as data set 41 to the Follower drives. Main
Control Word 70.09 MASTER SIGNAL 1 and speed reference 70.10 MASTER
SIGNAL 2 can also be sent through the link in the same DDCS message.
Typical Master drive parameter settings are:
Master drive parameter
Setting
MASTER
The Master drive sends master references 1...3 in one DDCS broadcast message
(cyclic communication) every 2 ms.
70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 can be scaled by parameter 70.30 MASTER SGN3
SCALE before it is sent to the Follower drive. Rescaling is done by parameter 70.31.
FOLLOW SGN3 SCALE. Scaling is useful e.g. when torque reference received from
the Master needs to be relative to the power of the motor connected to the Follower.
Program features
108
Follower drive(s)
In the Follower mode the speed and torque references are read from data set 41.
The Follower mode includes only fast data read from data set 41. Therefore Follower
mode can also be used with an external control system connected to DDCS channel
CH0 by sending a message to data set 41 from the control system. This is useful
when fast communication is required but there is no need for a real Master/Follower
application.
Data set #
Data word #
Follower signal
41
02.29 DS MCW
Setting
FOLLOWER
MASTER (if the speed reference is read from the Master drive)
MASTER (if the torque reference is read from the Master drive)
In some applications, both speed and torque control of the Followers are required.
For example if it is necessary to accelerate all drives along the same speed ramp up
to a certain speed before torque control can be started, switching between the speed
and torque control is required. The switching is done by controlling parameter 26.01
TORQ SELECTOR from an external control system (e.g. fieldbus control system) or
via adaptive programming.
A speed supervision function for a torque controlled Follower drive is available. See
parameters 23.07 WINDOW INTG ON 23.09 WINDOW WIDTH NEG and signal
07.02 AUX CTRL WORD 1 bit 7.
The Follower drive is able to detect a communication break. The action taken by the
drive upon a communication brake is defined by parameters 70.13 CH2 TIMEOUT
and 70.14 CH2 COM LOSS CTRL.
See also section Master/Follower communication on page 30 for Master/Follower
configuration during drive start-up.
Program features
109
Program features
110
(e .g . P L C )
E x te rn a l C o n tro l S y s te m
) + 5 &
F O L L O W E R 2
ra
.0
.0
.0
.1
.1
.3
.3
.3
.3
m e
1 S
8 C
9 M
0 M
1 M
2 C
5 F
6 F
7 F
te r
P E
H 2
A S
A S
A S
H 2
O L
O L
O L
s e ttin g s :
E D S C A L IN G
M /F M O D E
T E R S IG N A L
T E R S IG N A L
T E R S IG N A L
H W C O N N E C
L O W E R S E L
L F A U L T S E L
L E N A B L E S E
2
T
2 0 0 0 rp
M A S T E
2 2 6
2 3 0 1
2 0 9
IO N R IN G
F O L L O
F A U L T
M S W B
m
R
C H 2
P a
5 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
C H 2
) + 5 &
M A S T E R
W E R 2 + 3
IT 0
P a
5 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
9 8
ra
.0
.0
.0
.0
.1
.1
.0
.1
.3
.3
.0
m e
1 S
7 C
8 C
9 M
0 M
1 M
7 C
7 F
2 C
4 F
2 C
te r
P E
H 2
H 2
A S
A S
A S
H 2
O L
H 2
O L
O M
s e ttin g s :
E D S C A L IN G
N O D E A D D R
M /F M O D E
T E R S IG N A L
T E R S IG N A L
T E R S IG N A L
N O D E A D D R
L S P E E D R E F
H W C O N N E C
L O W E R M C W
M . M O D U L E
T
M
2 0 0 0 rp m
F O L L O W E R
8 0 1
1 0 1
1 0 7
2
M A S T E R
IO N R IN G
A S K F F F F
N O
) + 5 &
F O L L O W E R 3
R in g o r S ta r
T o p o lo g y in M /F lin k
C H 2
P a
5 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
7 0
9 8
ra
.0
.0
.0
.0
.1
.1
.0
.1
.3
.3
.0
m e
1 S
7 C
8 C
9 M
0 M
1 M
7 C
7 F
2 C
4 F
2 C
te r
P E
H 2
H 2
A S
A S
A S
H 2
O L
H 2
O L
O M
s e ttin g s :
E D S C A L IN G
N O D E A D D R
M /F M O D E
T E R S IG N A L
T E R S IG N A L
T E R S IG N A L
N O D E A D D R
L S P E E D R E F
H W C O N N E C
L O W E R M C W
M . M O D U L E
3
T
M
2 0 0 0 rp m
F O L L O W E R
8 0 1
1 0 1
1 0 7
3
M A S T E R
IO N R IN G
A S K F F F F
N O
The Main Control Word (02.26 USED MCW), speed reference (02.18 SPEED REF
4) and torque reference at the output of speed regulator (02.09 TORQUE REF 2) are
sent from the master to the followers. The Main Status Words (08.01 MAIN STATUS
WORD), actual speed (01.01 MOTOR SPEED FILT) and actual torque (01.07
MOTOR TORQ FILT2) are sent from the followers to the master. The master start is
prevented if the bit 0 of followers MSW is OFF and if one of the follower has a fault,
then also master is tripped to FOLLOWER FLT fault.
If master drive is faulted, it sends coast stop command also to followers.
Load share function with speed controlled Follower
Load sharing between Master drive and speed controlled Follower drives can be
used in several applications. The load share function is implemented by fine tuning
the speed reference with an additional term which is based on the torque reference
of the Master drive.
Load share is adjusted by parameter 25.03 LOAD SHARE and activated by 07.03
AUX CTRL WORD 2 bit 9. Parameters 23.18 FOLL SPD CTRL COR and 23.19
FOLL SPD COR MODE define how the Follower drives follow the Master torque.
Program features
111
The output of the load share function, 02.30 FOLL SPD CORR OUT, is added to
speed reference 02.02 SPEED REF3.
Note: The Master and Follower drives should have the same speed control tuning
values.
Note: Drooping (24.02 DROOP RATE) must be disabled when load share is used
with speed controlled Follower drives.
See control block diagrams on page 104 and in section Speed reference ramp on
page 304.
Process master on-line configuration
If the on-line configurable master is required the separate CACP board has to be
used. CACP works as communication master and 1 or 2 of drives can be process
masters and other drives are process followers. The process master can be
changed on-line without any interrupts in the process. For more information, see
chapter Program features for Master/Follower in ACS800 Configuration and Control
Program for ABB Industrial Drives Firmware Manual (3AUA0000021158 [English]).
Master/Follower link specification
Size of the link: One master and maximum of 10 Follower drives. If more than 10
Followers are required, an ABB representative should be consulted. The maximum
length of the fibre optic cables depends on the type of the used cable:
With RDCO-01 or RDCO-02:
- POF (Plastic Optic Fibre): Maximum cable length is 30 m.
- HCS (Hard-Clad Silica Fibre): Maximum cable length is 200 m.
For distances up to 1000 m: Use two Optical Converter/Repeater boards (NOCR-01)
with glass optic cable (GOF, 6.25 um, Multi-Mode).
With RDCO-03:
- POF (Plastic Optic Fibre): Maximum cable length is 10 m.
- HCS (Hard-Clad Silica Fibre): Not supported.
Transmission rate: 4 Mbit/s
Configuration: The role of the drive in the Master/Follower link can be changed
on-line through an external control system (connected to DDCS CH0) by parameter
70.08 CH2 M/F MODE or adaptive programming and thus there is no need for
hardware reconfiguration.
Total performance of the link: < 5 ms to transfer references between the Master
and Follower drives.
Protocol: DDCS (Distributed Drives Communication System)
Program features
112
50
Drive
stopped
Fan
acceleration
time
Drive
modulating
Fan
deceleration
time
IGBT temperature / C
Charging
Fan speed / Hz
Drive
modulating
Drive
stopped
50
10
Fan
acceleration
time
Fan
deceleration
time
IGBT temperature / C
Charging
Fan speed / Hz
55
Drive
modulating
Fan deceleration time
Fan acceleration time
25
10
IGBT temperature / C
Charging
90
112
Settings
Program features
Parameter
Additional information
113
LSU communication
Fibre optic link can be connected between line-side converter unit (LSU) and the
inverter unit (INU) in 4Q, low harmonic and liquid cooled single drives. Fibre optic
cable is connected between LSU control board CH0 and INU control board CH1 or
CH2. LSU's start, stop and reset commands can be given via INU and the actual
values can be read from LSU to INU, as well as DC and reactive power references
can be written from INU to LSU. If INU is faulted, also ISU is stopped. For further
details, see description of signals and parameters in groups 5 and 95.
Start by overriding system, when ISU starting is controlled by INU.
6WDUW(QDEOHG+:9
2Q
2II
$X[LOLDU\3RZHU21
2Q
2II
2Q
2II
&ORVHG
2SHQ
VHFRQGV
)LHOGEXV&RPPVWDUWV
(PHUJHQF\6WRSEXWWRQV
&KDUJLQJ
'&9ROWDJH,68,18
'LVFKDUJHG
&ORVHG
2SHQ
,680DLQ&RQWDFWRU
V
,680RGXODWLRQ
,180RGXODWLRQ
&RQWUROIURPWKH2YHUULGLQJ6\VWHP
0&:ELWV
06:ELWV
6WDWXV:RUGWR2YHUULGLQJ6\VWHP
2Q
2II
7RUTXHUHIHUHQFH
6WRS
6HTXHQFH
21
2))
2))
581
5$03287=(52
5$03+2/'
5$03,1=(52
5(6(7
,1&+,1*
2Q
2II
1HHGHGRQO\LIIDXOWVLWXDWLRQ
,1&+,1*
5(027(B&0'
5'<B21
5'<B581
5'<B5()
75,33('
2))67$
2))67$
$/$50
$76(732,17
5(027(
WLPH
*) Starting of modulation can be separated to free bit of MCW with parameter 95.06
LSU RUN MCW BIT.
Program features
114
There are several alternative for communication between the INU and LSU. This can
be selected by users parameter 95.05 LSU COMM SEL and it is not a HW
dependent like single drive or multidrive.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
95.01...95.02
95.03...95.04
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
05.01...05.09
05.10..05.11
05.21...26
M
3~
Drive
Sine filter
The sine filters are used in conjunction with the ACS800 System Control Program.
The Scalar motor control mode (instead of DTC mode) is used with a sine filter. See
Users Manual Sine Filters (3AFE68389178 [English]).
The sine filter function is activated by parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2
(selection (4) STEP UP). This selection activates scalar mode and sets internal
parameters for sine filter use. The function requires an RDIO extension module. This
Program features
115
activates scalar control mode with internal parameter settings. The following sine
filter protections are available.
Input
Additional information
DI/O EXT2:DI1
DI/O EXT2:DI2
DI/O EXT2:DI3
Not in use.
DI/O EXT2:RO1
DI/O EXT2:RO2
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
29.04 IR COMPENSATION
Diagnostics
Alarm
Signal
FAN OVERTEMP
Fault
Signal
CHOKE OTEMP
Program features
116
DC switch
DI2
charging
logic
charging
relay
M
With R8i inverters equipped with an optional DC switch, the charging logic is
controlled by the Switch Fuse Control Board, ASFC.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Program features
Actual value
Additional information
117
Additional information
Program features
Program features
1 0 .0 4
E N C O D E R
P O S C O U N T M O D E = R O U N D & D E G
P U L S E S F R O M
5 0 .0 9
7 .0 2 b 1 1
P O S C O U N T IN IT H IG H
R D Y
5 0 .0 8
R E S E T S Y N C
8 .0 1 b 3
7 .0 2 b 1 0
S Y N C D IS A B L E
F A U L T
7 .0 2 b 9
S Y N C C O M M A N D
S Y N C C O M M A N D
D I
P O S C O U N T IN IT L O W
S Y N C C M D
5 0 .0 7
> 1
> 1
P O S IT IO N C O U N T : L O G IC A N D
A D D
&
S
R
C A L C U L A T IO N D IA G R A M
8 .0 2 b 5
S Y N C R D Y
3 .1 0
P O S C O U N T R O U N D S
P O S C O U N T D E G R E E S
P O S C O U N T H IG H
3 .0 8
3 .0 9
P O S C O U N T L O W
3 .0 7
118
119
Example:
A basic position count function can be seen in the following figure. When
synchronisation is enabled (07.02 bit 10 SYNC DISABLE value is 0) and the next
positive edge of the SYNC CMD (07.02 bit 9) is encountered, the initial values of
POS COUNT INIT LOW and POS COUNT INIT HIGH (par. 50.08 and 50.09) are
loaded into the counter. (Initial values can only be used in the pulse edge count
mode.) Status signal SYNC RDY (08.02 bit 5) is set to indicate position counter
synchronisation. When the positioning has been completed by an external control
system (i.e. the motor can be stopped or some other sequence started), signal
SYNC RDY can be reset by RESET SYNC RDY (07.02 bit 11).
SYNC CMD 7.02 B9
SYNC DISABLE 7.02 B10
SYNC RDY 8.02 B5
RESET SYNC RDY 7.02 B11
ENCODER PULSES
POS COUNT LO 3.07
POS COUNT HI 3.08
or
POS COUNT ROUNDS 3.10
POS COUNT DEGREES 3.09
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
50 SPEED MEASUREMENT
Additional information
03.07...03.10
Program features
120
Firmware
Firmware loading package
Each drive product has a product specific loading package, which contains all
necessary software files to be downloaded to the RMIO board. The loading
packages define for example the inverter ratings which are different for AC and DC
supplied inverters. The type information of the loading package can be identified
from signal 04.01 SW PACKAGE VER. The downloaded application program
version can be identified from signal 04.03 APPLIC SW VERSION.
Program boot
The application program of the RMIO board is saved to the FPROM memory. After
switching on the auxiliary power, the program starts routines for initialisation and
loading of all tasks, parameters and the application program from the FPROM to the
RAM memory. This takes 8 seconds. A fault reset is given at the end of the boot
procedure and the control mode of the drive is changed to remote.
Memory handling
Parameter value changes through DriveWindow or CDP 312R control panel are
stored to the RAM and FPROM memories. Parameter value changes through
an external control system are stored only to the RAM memory. However, if
parameter changes made through external control need to be saved to the FPROM,
saving can be executed by setting parameter 16.06 PARAMETER BACKUP to
SAVE.
DriveWindow
or CDP 312R
parameter
change
RAM memory
POWER-UP
USER 1
LOAD
USER 2
LOAD
FACTORY
Par. 16.06
Parameter file
USER MACRO 1 file
USER 1
SAVE
USER 2
SAVE
When the power is turned off, 16 latest faults or alarms are saved to the FPROM
memory.
Settings
Program features
Parameter
Additional information
121
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Diagnostics
Drive diagnostics is informed by signals, data loggers and event and fault loggers.
Fault and event loggers
The fault logger collects 64 of the most recent faults into the fault buffer in the RAM
memory. The latest 16 faults are stored to the flash memory at the beginning of
an auxiliary power supply loss when an internal +24 V power supply is used.
The fault logger records all available information from the drive including fault, alarm,
reset and system messages.
Time format
Fault logger time is taken from the power-on counter and can be seen on the
CDP 312R control panel in format xx H zz MIN yy S = hours, minutes seconds (with
DriveWindow the format is xxxx:zz: yy.yyyy = hours:minutes:seconds). The counter
can be updated cyclically from an external control system if the system includes
a controller with a clock master (for example AC 80 / AC 800M). In this case the
DriveWindow and the CDP 312R control panel show the real date and time.
Data loggers 1 and 2
Data loggers are used to monitor selected signals and to store them for later retrieval
and analysis. The contents of the data loggers are stored to the RAM memory. There
are two data loggers on the RMIO board. Both data loggers consist of 1...4 channels.
The minimum sample interval is 1 ms. The total memory size of a data logger is 1024
bytes. The maximum number of samples depends on the data type:
Integer type signal or parameters reserve 1 byte.
Real type values reserve 2 bytes.
Example: Four real type signals are measured with data logger 1. The maximum
number of samples is 1024 / (2 bytes 4 channels) = 128.
Data loggers store the selected signals to the RAM memory every 5 milliseconds
Default signals
Data logger 1 default signals
01.10 DC VOLTAGE
01.12 PP TEMP
The default trigger mode for data loggers is a fault condition. Data logger 1 can also
be triggered by an external control system (e.g. fieldbus) or adaptive programming
via 07.02 Auxiliary Control Word 1 (bits 0 and 1).
Program features
122
Additional information
Note that the new node address becomes valid only after the next power-up of the
drive.
Program features
123
Note: If backup restore function does not restore all the information (e.g. ID run
results), restore the backup again. Use DriveWindow version 2.21 or newer or
update your older version using service pack available in ABB Library.
Note: The DriveWindow backup cannot be executed in local control mode.
Note: Remember to save the backup file after the backup is completed.
Settings
Parameter
Additional information
Diagnostics
Actual value
Additional information
Additional information
Program features
124
Select from the File menu: Parameters - Save as (parameter file name *.dwp).
Save both user macros (if used) to the PC: Parameters - Save as (parameter file
name *.dwp). (User macros are activated by setting parameter 99.11
APPLICATION MACRO to USER1/2 LOAD.)
Create a DriveWindow backup file (*.BPG) to PC. For instructions, see
DriveWindow 2 Users Manual [3AFE64560981 (English)].
Upload DriveAP 2.x application to PC (if used) from the DriveAP drive menu:
Upload - Save as (file name *.ap).
Program features
125
2) Download the new software version to the RMIO board from the DOS loading
package according to the software downloading instructions.
3) Restore parameters (groups 10...98) and ID run results from the old software
version to the new software version:
Select remote control mode.
Open the parameter file of the old software by selecting from the File menu:
Parameters - Open - (parameter file name *.dwp) - Open.
Select the appropriate drive.
Select from the File menu: Parameters - Download.
Note: When user macros are restored, save the stored user macro files (*.dwp) as
user macro 1 and 2 of the new software.
A version conflict notification appears. Proceed by clicking the YES button.
Program features
126
A user macro notification appears. If it is safe to proceed, click the YES button.
Program features
127
Fieldbus equivalent
Serial communication data between fieldbus adapter and drive is transferred in
integer format. Thus the drive actual and reference signal values must be scaled to
16-bit integer values. Fieldbus equivalent defines the scaling between the signal
value and the integer used in serial communication.
All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits (-32768...32767).
Example 1: If 20.09 TREF TORQMAX is set from external control system, an integer
value of 100 corresponds to 1%.
Example 2: Speed reference is defined by parameter 23.01 SPEED REF. Parameter
50.01 SPEED SCALING defines the motor speed (in rpm) at maximum reference
(20000 for external control system). Thus, sending a value 20000 from an external
control system into parameter 23.01 sets the speed reference to the rpm value
defined by parameter 50.01.
Fieldbus addresses
Type Rxxx adapter modules (such as RPBA, RCAN, RDNA, etc.): See the
appropriate users manual.
PROFIBUS-DP NPBA-12 module: See column PB in the following signal and
parameter tables. (Add 4000 in FMS Mode.)
Interbus-S NIBA-01 module:
xxyy 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal (xx = parameter number and
yy = subindex)
Example: The index for drive parameter 13.09 AI3 LOW VALUE is 1309 + 12288 =
13597 = 351D (hex).
128
Definition
Actual signal
Boolean
Character string
Def.
Default value
FbEq
Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
Integer
Pointer
Parameter
Pb
Packed boolean
PB
Real
129
Index Name/Value
Description
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
FbEq
PB T
See par.
50.01.
See par.
50.01.
See par.
50.01.
See par.
50.01.
100 = 1 Hz
10 = 1 A
100 = 1%
100 = 1%
10 = 1%
1=1V
10 R
1=1V
11
1 = 1C
12 R
1=1h
13 R
1=
100 kWh
14 R
1=1
15 I
Speed
Calculated motor speed
Speed
Measured motor speed
Speed
Actual speed used for the speed error calculation
Speed
Calculated drive output frequency
Frequency
Measured motor current (absolute value)
Current
Filtered motor torque. Filter time constant can be adjusted by
parameter 25.07 TORQ ACT FILT TIM.
Torque in percent of the rated motor torque
Motor torque
Torque in percent of the rated motor torque
Motor power
Power in percent of the rated motor power
Measured intermediate circuit voltage
Voltage
MOTOR VOLTAGE
Voltage
IGBT temperature
Temperature
Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered.
Time
kWh counter
Counter value
Status of digital inputs.
Example: 0001001 = DI1 and DI4 are on.
0001001
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
130
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
PB T
1 = 1C or
1
16 R
1 = 1C or
1
17 R
1 = 1C
18 R
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI1. See parameters 13.01 AI1 10000 =
HIGH VALUE and 13.02 AI1 LOW VALUE.
10 V or
20 mA
19 R
C or
01.17 MOTOR 2 TEMP
C or
01.18 MOTOR TEMP EST
C
01.19 AI1 [V]
-10...10 V
01.20 AI2 [mA]
-20...20 mA
01.21 AI3 [mA]
-20...20 mA
01.22 RO3-1 STATUS
0...127 (bin)
Voltage
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI2. See parameters 13.04 AI2 20000 =
HIGH VALUE and 13.05 AI2 LOW VALUE.
20 mA, 2 V
or 10 V
20 R
Current
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI3. See parameters 13.08 AI3 20000 =
HIGH VALUE and 13.09 AI3 LOW VALUE.
20 mA
21 R
Current
Status of relay outputs
1=1
22 I
20000 =
20 mA
23 R
20000 =
20 mA
24 R
Speed control
Torque control
25 I
26 R
Panel output
Motor cable thermal model output monitoring. See parameter
group 36 MOTOR CABLE PROTECTION.
1=1
27 R
1=1
28 R
1=1
29 R
131
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
PB T
01.30 IW
1=1
30 R
1 = 10 h
31 R
100 = 1%
37 R
1=1
38 R
1=1
41 I
1=1
42 I
See par.
50.01.
51 R
See par.
50.01.
52 R
See par.
50.01.
53 R
100 = 1%
54 R
100 = 1%
55 R
100 = 1%
56 R
100 = 1%
57 R
100 = 1%
58 R
0...300 A
01.31 FAN-ON-TIME
h
01.37 GENER TORQ FILT2
%
01.38 MOTOR RUN-TIME
h
01.41 EXT2 AI1
-20000...20000
01.42 EXT2 AI2
-20000...20000
Current
Running time of the drive cooling fan
Note: Resetting of the counter is recommended when the fan is
replaced. See parameter 16.09 RESET COUNTER.
Time
Filtered generating torque in percent of the rated motor or
generator torque. Same as 01.07 MOTOR TORQ FILT2, but with
opposite sign. Filter time constant can be adjusted by parameter
25.07 TORQ ACT FILT TIM.
Torque in percent of the rated motor torque
Running time of the motor fan
Note: The counter can be reset by parameter 16.09 RESET
COUNTER.
Time
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI1 of I/O extension module
EXT 2
Integer value. 20000 corresponds to the maximum analogue input
signal value.
Non-scaled value of analogue input AI2 of I/O extension module
EXT 2
Integer value. 20000 corresponds to the maximum analogue input
signal value.
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
-18000...18000 rpm
02.02 SPEED REF 3
-18000...18000 rpm
02.03 SPEED ERROR NEG
%
02.04 TORQUE PROP REF
%
Speed
Speed reference after the speed ramp
Speed
Difference between speed reference and actual speed.
If parameter 23.07 WINDOW INTG ON is active, 02.03 SPEED
ERROR NEG is filtered through the window function.
Difference
Output of the proportional part (P-part) of the PID controller
Output value
02.05 TORQUE INTEG REF Output of the integral part (I-part) of the PID controller
%
02.06 TORQUE DER REF
%
02.07 TORQ ACC COMP
REF
%
02.08 TORQUE REF 1
%
Output value
Output of the derivative part (D-part) of the PID controller
Output value
Output of the acceleration compensation
Output value
Limited torque reference
Value in percent of the nominal motor torque
132
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
PB T
100 = 1%
59 R
100 = 1%
60 R
TORQUE REF 4
Torque reference: sum of 02.10 TORQUE REF 3 and 26.02 LOAD 100 = 1%
COMPENSATION
61 R
Torque
%
02.10 TORQUE REF 3
02.11
-18000...18000 rpm
02.26 USED MCW
0...65535
100 = 1%
63 R
10 = 1%
64 R
10 = 1%
65 R
See par.
50.01.
66 R
See par.
50.01.
68 R
See par.
50.01.
69 R
100 = 1%
70 R
100 = 1Hz
71 R
100 = 1%
72 R
100 = 1%
73 R
10 = 1%
74 R
See par.
50.01.
75 R
02.22 TORQ FREQ LIM REF Torque reference after the frequency limiter
%
62 R
Torque
Limited torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque
limiters
100 = 1%
Pb
133
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
See par.
50.01.
100 = 1%
Pb
See par.
50.01.
-18000...18000 rpm
02.28 USED TORQ REF A
%
02.29 DS MCW
0...65535
02.30 FOLL SPD CORR
OUT
-18000...18000 rpm
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Speed
Torque reference. See control block diagram in section Torque
reference on page 306.
Value in percent of the nominal motor torque
Main control word used in a Master/Follower application
Control word value
Speed output correction of the load share function with speed
controlled Follower drive. See section Load share function with
speed controlled Follower on page 110.
Speed
Monitoring signals
03.03 RS
mohm
03.04 LS
mH
03.05 SIGMALS
mH
03.06 TR
ms
03.07 POS COUNT LO
0...65536
03.08 POS COUNT HI
0...65536
03.09 POS COUNT
DEGREES
-360...360 deg
03.10 POS COUNT
ROUNDS
-8388608...8388608
PB T
1=1
77 Pb
28676 =
1
78 R
100 = 1 mH 80 R
Leakage factor
Estimated time constant of the rotor
1 = 1 ms
81 R
1=1
82 I
1=1
83
1 = 1 deg
84 R
1=1
85 R
Time constant
Position counter value in pulses (16 least significant bits)
Integer value
Position counter value in pulses (16 most significant bits)
Integer value
Position counter value. Parameter 50.07 POS COUNT MODE
must be set to ROUND&DEG. This signal is used together with
signal 03.10 POS COUNT ROUNDS.
Position
Position counter value in total shaft revolutions. Parameter 50.07
POS COUNT MODE must be set to ROUND&DEG. This signal is
used together with signal 03.09 POS COUNT DEGREES.
Integer value
134
Index Name/Value
Description
03.11
DATALOG1 STATUS
-32768...32767
B0 = triggered on fault
B1 = triggered on set level
B2 = triggered on alarm
B3 = triggered on limit
B4 = triggered by user
B5 = triggered from level
B6 = trend triggered from difference
B7 = initialising
B8 = overwrite
B9 = filled
B10 = running
B11 = initialised
B12 = not initialised
03.12 PP 1 TEMP
C
03.13 PP 2 TEMP
C
03.14 PP 3 TEMP
C
03.15 PP 4 TEMP
C
03.16 CTRL BOARD TEMP
C
03.18 TEMP DIF MAX
C
03.19 PHASE U TEMP DIF
C
03.20 PHASE V TEMP DIF
C
03.21 PHASE W TEMP DIF
C
03.31 LSU ACT SIGNAL 1
-32768...32767
03.32 LSU ACT SIGNAL 2
-32768...32767
03.33 FOLLOWER2 MSW
0...65535
FbEq
PB T
86 Pb
1=1
87 R
1=1
88 R
1=1
89 R
1=1
90 R
1 = 1C
91 R
1 = 1C
93 R
1 = 1C
94 R
1 = 1C
95 R
1 = 1C
96 R
Temperature
Measured IGBT temperature of inverter module no. 2
Temperature
Measured IGBT temperature of inverter module no. 3
Temperature
Measured IGBT temperature of inverter module no. 4
Temperature
Control board (RMIO) temperature
Temperature
Maximum phase temperature difference
Temperature
Temperature difference between individual module phase U and
the average temperature of the rest of the modules
Temperature
Temperature difference between individual module phase V and
the average temperature of the rest of the modules
Temperature
Temperature difference between individual module phase W and
the average temperature of the rest of the modules
Temperature
Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.03 LSU PAR1 1 = 1
SEL. This signal is active only when parameter 95.05 LSU COMM
SEL = LIMITED.
Signal value
Line-side converter signal selected by parameter 95.04 LSU PAR2 1 = 1
SEL. This signal is active only when parameter 95.05 LSU COMM
SEL = LIMITED.
Signal value
08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD of Follower 2 drive.
Signal value
1=1
Pb
135
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
1=1
1=1
1=1
Pb
1=1
1=1
1=1
Pb
1=1
1=1
1=1
Pb
-32768...32767
03.35 FOLLOWER2 ACT3
-32768...32767
03.36 FOLLOWER3 MSW
0...65535
03.37 FOLLOWER3 ACT2
-32768...32767
03.38 FOLLOWER3 ACT3
-32768...32767
03.39 FOLLOWER4 MSW
0...65535
03.40 FOLLOWER4 ACT2
-32768...32767
03.41 FOLLOWER4 ACT3
-32768...32767
03.42 FOLL234 MSW
PB T
Signal value
Actual value 3 of Follower 2 drive. Signal source is selected by
parameter 70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 in the Follower 2 drive.
Signal value
08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD of Follower 3 drive.
Signal value
Actual value 2 of Follower 3 drive. Signal source is selected by
parameter 70.10 MASTER SIGNAL 2 in the Follower 3 drive.
Signal value
Actual value 3 of Follower 3 drive. Signal source is selected by
parameter 70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 in the Follower 3 drive.
Signal value
08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD of Follower 4 drive.
Signal value
Actual value 2 of Follower 4 drive. Signal source is selected by
parameter 70.10 MASTER SIGNAL 2 in the Follower 4 drive.
Signal value
Actual value 2 of Follower 4 drive. Signal source is selected by
parameter 70.11 MASTER SIGNAL 3 in the Follower 4 drive.
Signal value
Main Status Word of Followers 24 combined together. See bit
definitions from signal 08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD.
Following bits of Main Status Words have OR function:
- bit 3 TRIPPED
- bit 6 ON INHIB
- bit 7 ALARM
- bit 13 RUN INTERLOCK
- bit 15
Rest of the bits have then AND function and result of these is
written to this signal 03.42 FOLL234 MSW.
Example:
Follower 2: 08.01 MSW
0...65535
Signal value.
136
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
04 INFORMATION
Program versions
Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the
drive.
PB T
AMXR72x0
Product
A = Inverter software
D = DC drives software
I = Input bridge software
L = Large Drives software
Software application
B = Multi Block Programming Application
J = Cascade Control
M = System Control
N = PMSM System Control
P = Motion Control
S = Standard Control
T = FCB Application Template
U = Liquid Cooling Unit Application
Inverter hardware type
A = Custom Application Software
X = Multiple hardware (single drive & multidrive)
7 = ACS800-07/11/14/17LC (liquid cooled)
Control board type
A = NAMC-03 or NAMC-04 control board
M =NAMC-03 or NAMC-04 control board
B = NAMC-2x control board
C = AMC 3 control board
D = N2AC AMC board
E = NAMC-11 control board
G = NAMC-51 control board
R = RMIO control board
Software version number
04.03 APPLIC SW VERSION Displays the type and the version of the application program.
04.04 APBU EPLD
VERSION
04.11
BOARD TYPE
137
Index Name/Value
Description
05 LSU SIGNALS
These Line Supply Unit signals and inputs are visible with WIDE
and WTA selection in parameter 95.05 LSU COMM SEL when
optic fibre communication link is connected between inverter RMIO
control board CH1 and LSU RMIO control board CH0. Data sets
are used to transfer information in communication. See parameter
group 95 LSU.
Line to line voltage calculated by the line converter and sent to INU 1 = 1 V
every 100 ms. The value of parameter 92.05 D SET 13 VAL 2 must
be 111 in LSU.
V
05.02 LINE CURRENT [A]
A
05.03 POWER [kW]
kW
05.04 REACT POWER
[kVAr]
kVAr
05.05 LSU PP TEMP
C
05.06 LSU DI STATUS
0...127 (bin)
FbEq
Voltage
Line current measured by the line supply unit and sent to INU every 1 = 1 A
100 ms. The value of parameter of 92.06 D SET 13 VAL 3 must be
106 in LSU.
Current
Grid power calculated by the line supply unit and sent to INU every 1 = 1 kW
10 ms. The value of parameter 92.02 D SET 11 VAL 2 must be 108
in LSU.
Power in kilowatts.
Reactive grid power calculated by the line supply unit and sent to 1 = 1 kVAr
INU every 10ms. Positive value = capacitive, negative = reactive.
The value of parameter 92.03 D SET 11 VAL 3 must be 107 in LSU.
Reactive power
Power plate temperature of line supply unit, sent to INU every 500 1 = 1 C
ms. The value of parameter 92.12 D SET 17 VAL 3 must be 112 in
LSU.
Temperature
Status of line converter digital inputs DI7DI1, sent to INU every
100 ms. The value of parameter 92.04 D SET 13 VAL 1 must be
115 in LSU.
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
Pb
PB T
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
-32768...32767
05.08 LSU ACT2
-32768...32767
05.09 LSU ACT3
-32768...32767
05.10 LSU STATUS WORD
138
Index Name/Value
0...65535
Description
FbEq
Main status word of the line converter, sent to INU every 10 ms.
The parameter 92.01 D SET 11 VAL 1 must be 801 in LSU.
Bit
Name
Value
Description
RDY_ON
Operation enabled
Fault
No fault
RDY_RUN
RDY_REF
TRIPPED
46
7
10
Not in use
ALARM
MODULATING
REMOTE
NET OK
Warning
No warning
Converter modulates.
1112
13
14
15
05.11
PB T
Not in use
CHARGING
OR RDY_RUN
CHARGING
Supply fault word of the line converter, sent to INU every 500 ms.
The parameter 92.10 D SET 17 VAL 1 must be 911 in LSU.
1=1
PbI
139
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
PB T
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
CHARGING FLT
OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent
IGBT overtemperature
DI1
SHORT CIRC
Internal fault
10
COMM MODULE
11
12
EARTH FAULT
13
SYNCHRO FLT
14
DC UNDERVOLT
15
DC OVERVOLT
Supply alarm word of the line converter, sent to INU every 500 ms. 1 = 1
The parameter 92.11 D SET 17 VAL 2 must be 912 in LSU.
Pb
140
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
PB T
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
COMM MODULE
PANEL LOST
DI1
AI<MIN FUNC
IGBT overtemperature
CURRENT LIM
69
Not in use
10
NET LOST
11
12
13
14
Not in use
EARTH FAULT
15
Not in use
Main control word of the line converter, sent to INU every 10 ms.
The parameter 90.01 D SET 10 VAL 1 must be 701 in LSU.
1=1
Pb
1=1
1=1
1=1
0...65535
Bit
Name
Value
Description
ON/OFF
0 -> 1
12
3
Not in use
START
Start modulation
Stop modulation
46
7
Not in use
RESET
815
0 -> 1
Reset
Not in use
-32768...32767
05.22 LSU REF2
-32768...32767
05.23 LSU REF3
141
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
PB T
-32768...32767
05.24 LSU ACT4
Reads a data value from data set 19.01 of LSU or WTA every 500 1 = 1
ms. Programmable signal by LSU or WTA parameter 92.13 D SET
19 VAL 1.
Reads a data value from data set 19.02 of LSU or WTA every 500 1 = 1
ms. Programmable signal by LSU or WTA parameter 92.13 D SET
19 VAL 1.
Reads a data value from data set 19.3 of LSU or WTA every 500
1=1
ms. Programmable signal by LSU or WTA parameter 92.13 D SET
19 VAL 1.
-32768...32767
05.25 LSU ACT5
-32768...32767
05.26 LSU ACT6
-32768...32767
07 CONTROL WORDS
0...65535
Pb
Name
Value
ON
Enter RDY RUN state (08.01 MSW bit 1). IGBT or diode supply unit is started (supported
only with ACS800 multidrive and liquid cooled single drives.)
OFF1
Enter OFF state (08.01 MSW bit 0): Stop along the deceleration ramp defined by
parameter 22.02 DECELER TIME. Control pulses are removed at zero speed. Proceed to
READY TO SWITCH ON state unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
IGBT or diode supply unit is stopped (supported only with ACS800 single drives).
Note: Restart is not possible before the drive has decelerated to zero speed.
OFF2
Emergency OFF: Coast to stop. Enter OFF2 ACTIVE (08.01 MSW bit 4); proceed to ON
INHIB (08.01 MSW bit 6).
Stator and flux currents are set to zero and control pulses are removed.
Emergency Stop: Stop along the deceleration ramp defined by parameter 21.04 EME
STOP MODE (fast stop). Stator and flux currents are set to zero and control pulses are
removed. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE (08.01 MSW bit 5); proceed to ON INHIB (08.01 MSW
bit 6).
Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
See also section Emergency stop on page 65.
Enable operation. Enter RDY REF (08.01 MSW bit 2). Enable stator/armature pulses.
Raise flux to the nominal reference value, accelerate along speed ramp to the given
speed reference (Par. 23.01 SPEED REF).
Note: The Run Enable signal must be activated via digital input DI2 and the RUN
INTERLOCK function must deactivated by parameter 16.14 RUN INTERLOCK (08.01
MSW bit 13).
Inhibit operation, coast to stop. Enter operation inhibited (08.01 MSW bit 2 RDY REF
value is 0). Continue to RDY RUN state (08.01 MSW bit 1).
OFF3
RUN
142
Name
Value
RAMP OUT
ZERO
Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Stop along ramp (current and DC voltage
limits are in force).
See control block diagram in section Speed reference ramp on page 304.
Enter OPERATING.
See control block diagram in section Speed reference ramp on page 304.
Inhibit setpoint (= speed or frequency reference). Input of the speed ramp is forced to
zero.
See control block diagram in section Speed reference ramp on page 304.
Fault reset (0 -> 1) if an active fault exists. Enter ON INHIB (08.01 MSW bit 6).
RAMP HOLD
RAMP IN
ZERO
RESET
1
0
INCHING 1
No control from external system (exception: OFF1, OFF2 and OFF3 commands)
10
INCHING 2
REMOTE
CMD
143
Index Name/Value
Description
07 CONTROL WORDS
0...65535
FbEq
-
Bit
Name
Description
RESTART
DLOG
TRIGG
LOGGER
RAMP BYPASS
BAL RAMP
OUT
FLUX ON DC
FLUX ON
HOLD NCONT
WINDOW
CTRL
BAL NCONT
SYNC
COMMAND
10
SYNC
DISABLE
11
RESET SYNC
RDY
12
ENABLE
RAMPED INCH
REF
13
DO1 CONTROL
14
DO2 CONTROL
15
DO3 CONTROL
PB T
Pb
144
Index Name/Value
Description
FbEq
Bit
Name
Description
EXT1 DO1
CONTROL
EXT1 DO2
CONTROL
EXT2 DO1
CONTROL
EXT2 DO2
CONTROL
4...5
Not in use
FOLL SPEED
REF
FOLL TORQ
REF
FOLL SPD
CORR ENA
10
MASTER
11
FOLLOWER
12
USER MACRO
CTRL
13...15
Not in use
PB T
Pb
145
Index Name/Value
Description
0...65535
FbEq
PB T
08 STATUS WORDS
08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD Main Status Word (MSW). A 16-bit data word.
0...65535
Pb
Name
Value
Description
RDY ON
Ready to switch on. If the inverter unit has an internal control link to the start/stop
control of the IGBT supply unit or diode bridge unit: power supply is switched on.
OFF
Not ready to switch on. This state is active as long as the Emergency OFF or
Emergency Stop commands are active (OFF2 or OFF3).
If the inverter unit has an internal control link to the start/stop control of the IGBT
supply unit or diode bridge unit: power supply is switched off.
RDY RUN
Ready to operate
RDY REF
Operation inhibited
No fault
4
5
6
TRIPPED
OFF2 STA
OFF3 STA
ON INHIB
OFF2 inactive
OFF2 active
OFF3 inactive
OFF3 active
No switch on inhibition
Alarm
ALARM
1
0
No alarm
AT SETPOINT
OPERATING. 01.04 MOTOR SPEED equals 02.18 SPEED REF4 within tolerance
limits. Default setting for the tolerance is 10% of the motor nominal speed.
01.04 MOTOR SPEED differs from 02.18 SPEED REF4, i.e. the difference is outside
the tolerance limits. Default setting for the tolerance is 10% of the motor nominal
speed.
Actual speed or frequency value equals or is greater than the supervision limit
defined by parameter 50.10 SPEED ABOVE LIMIT. Valid in both rotation directions
regardless of parameter 50.10 value.
Motor parameters have been set and Prevention of Unexpected Start-up is inactive.
Motor parameters have not been set and/or Prevention of Unexpected Start-up is
active.
9
10
REMOTE
ABOVE LIMIT
11
Not in use
12
INTERNAL
INTERLOCK
146
Name
Value
Description
13
RUN
INTERLOCK
No RUN INTERLOCK.
14
MODULATING
15
Not in use
Index
Name/Value
FbEq
08 STATUS WORDS
08.02
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
LOGG DATA
READY
OUT OF WINDOW
EMERG STOP
COAST
MAGNETIZED
RUN DISABLE
SYNC RDY
1 START NOT
DONE
IDENTIF RUN
DONE
START
INHIBITION
LIMITING
10
TORQ CONTROL
11
ZERO SPEED
12
INTERNAL
SPEED FB
13
14
USER MACRO 1
15
USER MACRO 2
PB T
Pb
147
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
08.03
LIMIT WORD 1
Pb
Pb
08.04
Bit
Name
Active Limit
Pull-out limit
10
11
12
DC UNDERVOLT LIM
DC undervoltage limit
13
DC OVERVOLT LIM
DC overvoltage limit
14
TORQUE LIMIT
15
FREQ LIMIT
0...65535
LIMIT WORD 2
0...65535
Bit
Name
Active Limit
P MOTORING LIM
P GENERATING LIM
4...15
Not in use
PB T
148
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
08.05
DI STATUS WORD
Pb
Pb
Bit
Name
Description
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
EXT1_DI1
EXT1_DI2
EXT1_DI3
EXT2_DI1
10
EXT2_DI2
11
EXT2_DI3
12
DI7 (DIIL)
13...
15
Not in use
PB T
08.06
0...65535
AUX STATUS
WORD 2
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
FAN ON
CMD
1...15
Not in use
149
Index
Name/Value
Description
08.07
A 16-bit data word. The LIMIT WORD INV includes information on the internal current limits. If any of the bit values are 1, signal
08.03 LIMIT WORD 1 bit 4 TORQ INV CUR LIM is set to 1.
08.10
FbEq
Bit
Name
0...1
Not in use
INTG PP TEMP
PP OVER
TEMP
PP OVERLOAD
OVERLOAD
CUR
CONT DC CUR
10
CONT OUT
CUR
11
CONT DC CUR
12
CONT OUT
CUR
13...
15
Not in use
Pb
Description
0...65535
MAIN STATUS
WORD2
Main Status Word 2. A 16-bit data word. Bits 07, 9, 1113 are
same as 08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD.
0...65535
PB T
Bit
Name
Description
LIMITING
10
GRID ALARM
14
TOGGLE BIT
Pb
150
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
08.20
INV ENABLED WORD A 16-bit data word. The INV ENABLED WORD includes
information on the inverter module operation status. The inverters
are ready for operation (i.e. all bit values are 1) when inverter
module DC switches are closed, DC intermediate circuit is
charged and the modules are allowed to start modulation.
PB T
Pb
Pb
08.21
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
INV1 ENABLED
INV2 ENABLED
INV3 ENABLED
INV4 ENABLED
INV5 ENABLED
INV6 ENABLED
INV7 ENABLED
INV8 ENABLED
INV9 ENABLED
INV10 ENABLED
10
INV10 ENABLED
11
INV12 ENABLED
12...
15
Not in use
Bit
Name
Description
10
11
12...
15
Not in use
151
Index
Name/Value
Description
08.22
A 16-bit data word. The INT CONFIG WORD includes information on the number of inverter modules connected to the APBU
branching unit. INT CONFIG fault is activated if the number of R8i
inverter modules recognized by application program during PPCC
link initialisation is not equal to original number of inverters. See
section Reduced run function on page 81.
0...65535
FbEq
Bit
Name
Description
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
INT8
INT9
INT10
10
INT11
11
INT12
12...
15
Not in use
PB T
Pb
152
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
08.23
A 16-bit data word. The LCU (= IGBT or diode supply unit) Status
Word includes information on the line-side converter status.
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
RDY_ON
RDY_RUN
Ready to operate
RDY_REF
Operation enabled
TRIPPED
Fault
4...6
Not in use
ALARM
Alarm
MODULATING
Modulating
REMOTE
10
NET OK
11...13
Not in use
14
CHARGING
15
Not in use
PB T
Pb
153
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09 FAULT WORDS
ABB Drive Profile Fault Words. For the possible causes and
remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
09.01
FAULT WORD 1
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
SHORT CIRC
OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent
DC OVERVOLT
ACS800 TEMP
IGBT overtemperature
EARTH FAULT
MOTOR TEMP M
MOTOR TEMP
SYSTEM FAULT
UNDERLOAD
Underload
OVERFREQ
Overspeed
10
MPROT SWITCH
11
12
SC (INU1)
13
SC (INU2)
14
SC (INU3)
15
SC (INU4)
PB T
Pb
154
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.02
FAULT WORD 2
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
SUPPLY PHASE
NO MOTOR
DATA
DC UNDERVOLT
CABLE TEMP
RUN DISABLE
ENCODER ERR
IO COMM ERR
CTRL B TEMP
Not in use
OVER SWFREQ
10
AI<MIN FUNC
11
PPCC LINK
12
COMM MODULE
13
PANEL LOSS
14
MOTOR STALL
Motor stall
15
MOTOR PHASE
PB T
Pb
155
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.03
SYSTEM FAULT
WORD
Pb
Pb
09.04
Bit
Name
Description
FLT (F1_7)
USER MACRO
FLT (F1_4)
FLT (F1_5)
FLT (F2_12)
FLT (F2_13)
FLT (F2_14)
FLT (F2_15)
FLT (F2_16)
FLT (F2_17)
10
FLT (F2_18)
11
FLT (F2_19)
Illegal instruction
12
FLT (F2_3)
13
FLT (F2_1)
14
FLT (F2_0)
15
Not in use
0...65535
ALARM WORD 1
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
START INHIBI
EM STOP
Emergency stop
MOTOR TEMP M
MOTOR TEMP
ACS800 TEMP
IGBT overtemperature
ENCODER ERR
T MEAS CIRC
DIGITAL IO
ANALOG IO
EXT DIGITAL IO
10
EXT ANALOG IO
11
CH2 COMM
LOSS
12
MPROT SWITCH
13
EM STOP DEC
14
EARTH FAULT
15
SAFETY SWITC
PB T
156
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.05
ALARM WORD 2
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
MOTOR FAN
UNDERLOAD
Underload
INV OVERLOAD
CABLE TEMP
ENCODER A<>B
FAN OVERTEMP
Not in use
POWFAIL FILE
POWDOWN FILE
MOTOR STALL
Motor stall
10
AI<MIN FUNC
11
COMM MODULE
12
BATT FAILURE
13
PANEL LOSS
14
DC UNDERVOLT
15
RESTARTED
PB T
Pb
157
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.06
FAULT WORD 3
Pb
Pb
09.11
Bit
Name
Description
MOTOR FAN
(Not in use)
SAFETY
SWITCH
T MEAS CIRC
START INHIBI
GD DISABLED X
INT CONFIG
CHOKE OTEMP
Not in use
10
ENCODER A<>B
11
DC HIGH RUSH
12
INV OVERTEMP
13
MOD CHOKE T
14
MOD BOARD T
15
TEMP DIFF
0...65535
ALARM WORD 3
0...65535
Bit
Name
0...11
Not in use
12
INV OVERTEMP
13
MOD CHOKE T
14
MOD BOARD T
15
TEMP DIFF
PB T
Description
158
Index
Name/Value
Description
09.13
CURRENT UNBAL
FW
0...65535
PB T
Pb
Bit
Name
Description
CUR UNBAL 1
CUR UNBAL 2
CUR UNBAL 3
CUR UNBAL 4
CUR UNBAL 5
CUR UNBAL 6
CUR UNBAL 7
CUR UNBAL 8
CUR UNBAL 9
CUR UNBAL 10
10
CUR UNBAL 11
11
CUR UNBAL 12
12...
15
Not in use
FbEq
159
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.14
OVERCURRENT FW
1=1
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
OVERCURR 1
OVERCURR 2
OVERCURR 3
OVERCURR 4
OVERCURR 5
OVERCURR 6
OVERCURR 7
OVERCURR 8
OVERCURR 9
OVERCURR 10
10
OVERCURR 11
11
OVERCURR 12
12...
15
Not in use
PB T
Pb
160
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.15
SHORT CIRC FW
1=1
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
SC INV1
SC INV2
SC INV3
SC INV4
SC INV5
SC INV6
SC INV7
SC INV8
SC INV9
SC INV10
10
SC INV11
11
SC INV 12
12
SC PHASE U
13
SC PHASE V
14
SC PHASE W
15
Not in use
PB T
Pb
161
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.16
OVERTEMP FW
1=1
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
10
11
12
OVERTEMP
PHASE U
13
OVERTEMP
PHASE V
14
OVERTEMP
PHASE W
15
Not in use
PB T
Pb
162
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.17
TEMP DIF FW
1=1
0...65535
Bit
Name
Description
10
11
12
13
14
15
Not in use
PB T
Pb
163
Index
Name/Value
Description
FbEq
09.18
TEMP DIF AW
1=1
Pb
1=1
Pb
09.20
Bit
Name
Description
10
11
12
TEMP DIF
PHASE U
13
TEMP DIF
PHASE V
14
TEMP DIF
PHASE W
15
Not in usehh
0...65535
AP AFW
Alarm and Fault word. This word can be used with adaptive
programming (typically for fieldbus information). See ACS600/
ACS800 Application Guide Adaptive Program for System
Application Program 7.x [3AFE68420075 (English)].
PB T
164
Index
09.30
09.31
09.32
09.33
09.34
09.35
09.36
09.37
09.38
09.39
Name/Value
Description
0...65535
Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing for the
codes.
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
0...FFFF (hex)
Fieldbus code
FbEq
PB T
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
1=1
165
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
10 DIGITAL INPUTS
10.01
START/STOP
Defines the source for the start and stop commands when
I/O control is activated either by setting parameter 98.02
COMM. MODULE to NO or by setting parameter 10.07 HAND/
AUTO to HAND.
1 = NO
2 = DI3
Start and stop through digital input DI3. Stop by falling edge of
digital input 1 -> 0. Start by rising edge of digital input 0 -> 1.
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
10.02
10.03
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
DIRECTION
1 = FORWARD
Fixed to forward
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
RESET
1 = NO
No reset source
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
Def.
PB
101
102
103
166
Index
10.04
Name/Selection
Description
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
SYNC CMD
FbEq
Def.
PB
104
105
106
10.05
10.06
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
KLIXON
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
1 = NO
167
Index
10.07
10.08
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
HAND/AUTO
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
START INHIB DI
Def.
PB
107
108
1 = NO 109
10.09
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
SAFETY SWITCH
Defines the source for the motor safety switch monitoring. Fault
is created if the switch was opened during run. An alarm is
created if the drive was already stopped.
1 = NO
168
Index
10.10
10.11
Name/Selection
Description
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
I/O MACRO
CHANGE
1 = NO
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
MOT PROT
SWITCH
1 = NO
No overload protection
2 = DI3
3 = DI4
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=NO
110
1 = NO
169
Index
Name/Selection
Description
4 = DI5
5 = DI6
6 = EXT2 DI1
7 = EXT2 DI2
8 = EXT2 DI3
9 = DI7
11 REFERENCE
SELECT
11.01
11.02
11.03
FbEq
PB
126
OFF
127
128
20000
176
177
EXT REF1 SELECT Selects the speed reference through analogue input or external
reference.
1 = STD AI1
2 = STD AI2
3 = EXT REF
AI+FBA SPEED
REF
0 = OFF
Inactive
1 = ON
Active
EXT REFERENCE
-32768...32767
Integer value
13 ANALOGUE
INPUTS
13.01
Def.
1=1
-32768...32767
Integer value
-32768...32767
Integer value
170
Index
Name/Selection
Description
13.03
FILTER AI1
0...30000 ms
-32768...32767
Integer value
13.05
-32768...32767
Integer value
13.06
MINIMUM AI2
1 = 0 mA
2 = 4 mA
13.04
3 = -20 mA
FILTER AI2
0...30000 ms
13.08
-32768...32767
Integer value
13.09
-32768...32767
Integer value
13.07
13.10
13.11
13.12
13.13
MINIMUM AI3
1 = 0 mA
0 mA
2 = 4 mA
4 mA
FILTER AI3
0...30000 ms
MINIMUM AI1
1 = 0 mA
0 mA
2 = 2 V / 4 mA
2 V / 4 mA
3 = -10 V
1 = NORMAL
Normal scaling:
-20 mA / -2 V / -10 V020 mA / 2 V / 10 V = -2000020000
2 = 4 mA
420 mA = 020000
FbEq
1=1
Def.
PB
1000
178
179
180
181
1000
182
10000
183
184
185
1000
186
187
171
Index
13.14
13.15
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
3 = PT100
Defines the filter time constant for extension module 2 analogue 1 = 1 ms 1000
input AI1.
0...30000 ms
PB
Defines the filter time constant for extension module 2 analogue 1 = 1 ms 1000
input AI2.
0...30000 ms
14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Control of the digital outputs. See section Digital outputs on
page 56.
14.01
14.02
14.03
14.04
14.05
DO1 CONTROL
1=1
0 = OFF
1 = ON
DO1
GROUP+INDEX
-99999999
023
Bit number
DO2
GROUP+INDEX
-99999999
023
Bit number
0=
OFF
201
801
202
203
801
204
205
172
Index
Name/Selection
Description
14.06
DO3
GROUP+INDEX
-99999999
0...23
Bit number
EXT2 DO1
GR+INDEX
-99999999
0...23
Bit number
EXT2 DO2
GR+INDEX
-99999999
0...23
Bit number
DO2 GR+IND
MODE
0 = REM/LOCAL
1 = LOCAL
14.07
14.08
14.09
14.10
14.11
14.12
FbEq
1=1
Def.
PB
801
206
207
801
208
209
806
210
211
212
*Example: If parameters 14.02 and 14.03 are set to 801 and 1, DO1 is active when 08.01 Main Status Word bit 1 is
1 = READY. If parameters 14.02 and 14.03 are set to -801 and 3, DO1 is active when 08.01 Main Status Word bit 3 is 0.
173
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
15.01
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT1
Def.
PB
106
226
NO
227
228
100 =
1s
0.1
229
1=1
100
230
101
231
NO
232
An external control system can also control the output. The data
set in which the signal is transmitted to the drive is directed into
one of the data parameters 19.01...19.08 using parameters
90.01...90.18. The data parameter is then coupled to the
analogue output with this parameter.
15.02
15.03
09999
INVERT AO1
0 = NO
1 = YES
MINIMUM AO1
1=1
15.04
15.05
15.06
15.07
1 = 0 mA
0 mA
2 = 4 mA
4 mA
3 = 10 mA
FILTER AO1
0...10 s
SCALE AO1
0...65536
Nominal value
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT2
0...9999
INVERT AO2
0 = NO
1 = YES
1=1
174
Index
Name/Selection
Description
15.08
MINIMUM AO2
1 = 0 mA
0 mA
2 = 4 mA
4 mA
3 = 10 mA
FILTER AO2
0...10 s
SCALE AO2
0...65536
Nominal value
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT3
15.09
15.10
15.11
FbEq
Def.
PB
233
100 =
1s
0.1
234
1=1
3000
235
101
236
NO
237
238
100 =
1s
0.1
239
1=1
3000
240
Analogue outputs AO3 and AO4 are available when RAIO I/O
Extension module is used and parameter 98.06 AI/O EXT
MODULE 1 is set to UNIPOLAR AI or BIPOLAR AI. See also
parameters 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE 1 and 98.11 AI/O EXT1
LOCATION.
0...9999
INVERT AO3
0 = NO
1 = YES
MINIMUM AO3
1 = 0 mA
0 mA
2 = 4 mA
4 mA
3 = 10 mA
4 = 12 mA
Used with 420 mA signals with meters which have zero point
in the middle of the range, e.g. -100001000 rpm.
15.14
FILTER AO3
0...10 s
15.15
SCALE AO3
0...65536
Nominal value
15.12
15.13
1=1
175
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
15.16
ANALOGUE
OUTPUT4
Def.
PB
101
241
NO
242
243
100 =
1s
0.1
244
1=1
3000
245
1 mA =
1000
20000
20000
15.17
15.18
15.19
15.20
15.21
15.22
15.23
15.24
0...9999
INVERT AO4
0 = NO
1 = YES
1=1
MINIMUM AO4
1 = 0 mA
0 mA
2 = 4 mA
4 mA
3 = 10 mA
4 = 12 mA
Used with 420 mA signals with meters which have zero point
in the middle of the range, e.g. -100001000 rpm.
FILTER AO4
0...10 s
SCALE AO4
0...65536
Nominal value
EXT2 AO1 OFFSET Defines the offset value for extension module 2 analogue
output AO1.
0...20 mA
Offset
0...30000
20000 = 20 mA
EXT2 AO2 OFFSET Defines the offset value for extension module 2 analogue
output AO2.
1 mA =
1000
0...20 mA
Offset
0...30000
20000 = 20 mA
176
Index
Name/Selection
Description
16 SYSTEM CTR
INPUTS
16.01
RUN ENABLE
1 = INTERLOCK
2 = FAULT
If the DI2 voltage drops to 0 V, the drive coasts to stop and fault
RUN DISABLE is generated.
3 = ALARM
PARAMETER
LOCK
1 = LOCKED
16.02
16.03
16.04
0 = OPEN
PASS CODE
Selects the pass code for the parameter lock. See parameter
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK.
0...30000
LOCAL LOCK
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
2=
FAULT
251
1=1
OPEN
252
253
1=1
FALSE 254
16.05
0 = FALSE
1 = TRUE
USER MACRO
CHG
1 = NOT SEL
2 = ACW2 BIT 12
3 = I/O CHANGE
255
177
Index
Name/Selection
Description
16.06
PARAMETER
BACKUP
0 = DONE
1 = SAVE
CTRL BOARD
SUPPLY
16.07
FbEq
1=1
Def.
PB
DONE
256
0 = INTERNAL 24V The RMIO control board is supplied from internal power supply
from the inverter module. After power fail saving function the
RMIO board is booted.
1 = EXTERNAL 24V The RMIO control board is powered from an external supply.
After power fail saving function the RMIO is not automatically
booted.
16.08
0 = CONST 50HZ
1 = RUN/STOP
16.09
2 = CONTROLLED
Fan speed is determined from the IGBT temperature vs. the fan
speed curve.
RESET COUNTER
Resets the motor cooling fan or drive cooling fan running time
counter.
1 = NO
No reset
2 = MOTOR TIME
3 = FAN ON TIME
16.10
INT CONFIG USER Defines the number of parallel connected R8i inverter modules
in the drive. Activates the reduced run function. See section
Reduced run function on page 81.
1...12
16.14
RUN INTERLOCK
ON
Active (Main Status Word 08.01 bit 13 value is 1). Motor start is
prevented or motor stops if it was already running.
NO
259
OFF
264
Inactive
178
Index
Name/Selection
Description
17 DC HOLD
17.01
DC HOLD
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
NO
276
1=1
277
1=1
30
278
107
301
When both the reference and the speed drop below the value
defined by parameter 17.02 DC HOLD SPEED, the drive will
stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the
motor. The current is set by parameter 17.03 DC HOLD
CURRENT. When the reference speed exceeds parameter
17.02 value, normal drive operation continues.
SPEEDmotor
DC hold
t
Ref.
DC HOLD SPEED
(par. 17.02)
Active
0 = NO
Inactive
17.02
DC HOLD SPEED
0...3600 rpm
Speed
17.03
DC HOLD
CURRENT
0...100%
18.01
LED PANEL
OUTPUT
0...9999
179
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
18.02
SCALE PANEL
1=1
100
302
1=1
326
1=1
327
19 DATA STORAGE
Scaling factor
Parameters for receiving information from or sending to an
external control system. The parameters are unconnected and
they can be used for linking, testing and commissioning
purposes. See chapter Fieldbus control.
AC 800M / AC 80
RMIO/NAMC-xx
Dataset table
Data set
14
A
Data
Index
set
Index 1
Index 2
Index 3
14
Address
assignment of
dataset
Group
Index
90
08
For
DriveWindow
PC tool
19.01
RMIO/NAMC-xx
Dataset table
Data set
15
Data
Index
set
Index 1
B
Index 2
Index 3
15
Address
assignment of
dataset
Group
Index
92
08
For
DriveWindow
PC tool
19.02
19.01
DATA 1
-32768...32767
Data value
DATA 2
-32768...32767
Data value
...
...
...
...
...
19.08
DATA 8
19.02
-32768...32767
1=1
333
Data value
180
Index
Name/Selection
Description
20 LIMITS
20.01
MINIMUM SPEED
-9000...1500 rpm
FbEq
Def.
PB
See
par.
99.05.
351
See par.
50.01.
See
par.
99.05.
352
See par.
50.01.
4% of
nom.
motor
speed
353
170
354
100 =
1%
300
355
100 =
1%
-300
356
100 =
1%
300
357
100 =
1%
-300
358
100 =
1%
300
359
100 =
1%
-300
360
See par.
50.01.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed
setting, parameter 99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If
Par. 99.05 value is changed, the default speed limit is
also changed.
MAXIMUM SPEED
-1500...9000 rpm
20.03
ZERO SPEED
LIMIT
0...15000 rpm
20.04
MAXIMUM
CURRENT
Defines the allowed maximum motor current Ihd. The maximum 100 =
values are limited according to the duty cycle tables. See the
1%
appropriate technical catalogue.
0...200%
20.05
MAXIMUM
TORQUE
0...600%
MINIMUM
TORQUE
-600...0%
SPC TORQMAX
0...600%
20.08
SPC TORQMIN
-600...0%
20.09
TREF TORQMAX
0...600%
TREF TORQMIN
-600...0%
20.06
20.07
20.10
181
Index
Name/Selection
Description
20.11
FREQ TRIP
MARGIN
0...500 Hz
PULLOUT TCOEF
MAX
40...100%
PULLOUT TCOEF
MIN
20.12
20.13
FbEq
|T|
Def.
PB
50
361
1=1
70
362
1=1
50
363
1=1
364
20 Hz
20.14
f / Hz
0...100%
ADAPTIVE UDC
MEAS
0 = OFF
182
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
20.15
UNDERVOLT
TORQ UP
10 =1%
500
365
-125
366
100 =
1%
300
367
100 =
1%
-300
368
376
T
UNDERVOLT TORQ UP
(par. 20.15)
UDC / V
UDC nominal
DC UNDERVOLT LIM
UNDERVOLT TORQ DN
(par. 20.16)
-T
20.16
0...600%
UNDERVOLT
TORQ DN
20.17
20.18
-500...0%
P MOTORING LIM
0...600%
P GENERATING
LIM
-600...0%
21 START/STOP
FUNC
21.01
2 = DC MAGN
183
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
3 = CNST DC
MAGN
CONST MAGN
TIME
377
30...10000 ms
378
379
This mode remembers the last position of the motor shaft. This
minimises possible shaft movement during the next start. See
parameter 21.11 START JERK COMP.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC
magnetising is selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.08
MOTOR CTRL MODE = SCALAR.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set
magnetising time has passed although the motor
magnetisation is not completed. Ensure always in
applications where a full break-away torque is essential that the
constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of
full magnetisation and torque.
21.02
21.04
STOP FUNCTION
Selects the motor stop function in local and I/O control modes.
1 = STOP
RAMPING
2 = STOP TORQ
3 = COAST STOP
Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor coasts to
stop.
1 = STOP
RAMPING
2 = STOP TORQ
3 = COAST STOP
Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor coasts to
stop.
4 = FOLLOW STOP Follower drive is decelerated to a stop with the Master drive
torque reference. 07.01 Main Control Word bit 6 (RAMP IN
ZERO) value is set to zero and emergency stop ramp is
activated.
5 = EXT DEC REF
184
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
1800
380
381
20
382
OFF
384
385
386
387
6 = EXT DEC REF2 Stop according to the external speed reference using
emergency stop deceleration reference received from fieldbus.
Deceleration of speed reference follows Emergency stop ramp
time in follower drive.
21.05
EMSTOP DER
MAX L
0...18000 rpm/s
21.06
EMSTOP DER MIN Defines the minimum deceleration rate for emergency stop. If
1=1
L
the drive is not able to decelerate within the window defined by
parameters 21.06 EMSTOP DER MIN L and 21.05 EMSTOP
DER MAX L, it is stopped by coasting and 08.02 AUX STATUS
WORD bit 2 value is set to 1.
Setting this parameter to 0 rpm/s (= default value) disables the
supervision of the maximum deceleration.
Actual deceleration can be monitored with signal 02.16 dv/dt.
See also parameter 21.07 EM STOP DEC MON DEL and
section Emergency stop on page 65.
21.07
21.09
0...18000 rpm/s
EM STOP DEC
MON DEL
Defines the time delay between the emergency stop signal and 10 = 1 s
the start of the deceleration monitoring. See parameters 21.06
EMSTOP DER MAX L and 21.05 EMSTOP DER MIN L.
0...100 s
Time delay
AUTO RESTART
0 = OFF
Inactive
1 = ON
Active
AUTO RESTART
TIME
Defines the maximum time for a power failure for the auto
restart function (21.09 AUTO RESTART). This time also
includes the charging delay of the inverters.
0.3...5 s
Maximum time
21.11
START JERK
COMP
0...100%
Value in percent
21.12
LOCAL EMSTOP
MODE
1 = DI
Digital input
2 = DI+FIELDBUS
21.10
10 = 1 s
1=1
185
Index
Name/Selection
Description
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01
Defines the acceleration time i.e. the time required for the
speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter
50.01 SPEED SCALING.
ACCELER TIME
FbEq
Def.
PB
100 =
1s
20
401
100 =
1s
20
402
100 = 1
403
10 = 1 s
20
404
0...1000 s
Acceleration time
DECELER TIME
Defines the deceleration time i.e. the time required for the
speed to change from the value defined by parameter 50.01
SPEED SCALING to zero.
The maximum deceleration time is 1800 s (deceleration time
can be expanded by parameter 22.03 ACC/DEC TIME SCLE).
If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed
drive operating limits. If there is any doubt about the
deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC
overvoltage control is on (parameter 30.23 OVERVOLTAGE
CTL).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia
application, the drive should be equipped with an electric
braking option for example with a brake chopper and a brake
resistor.
22.03
22.04
0...1000 s
Deceleration time
ACC/DEC TIME
SCLE
0.1...100
Multiplication factor
0...3000 s
Deceleration time
186
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
22.05
SHAPE TIME
100 =
1s
405
0...1000 s
OFF
406
1 = 1 ms 4.05
407
408
426
427
Linear
S-curve
t (s)
acceleration
time
(par. 22.01)
ramp shape
time
(par. 22.05)
VARIABLE SLOPE
1 = ON
0 = OFF
Control inactive
22.07
4.1...30000 ms
22.08
See par.
20.01...20.02 (rpm)
22.06
23 SPEED REF
23.01
SPEED REF
Defines the main speed reference for the speed controller input. See par.
50.01.
See par.
20.01...20.02 (rpm)
Speed reference.
CONST SPEED 1
23.02
1=1
187
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
23.03
CONST SPEED 2
1=1
428
See par.
50.01.
429
10 = 1%
100
430
431
SPEED
CORRECTION
SPEED SHARE
Speed correction
Speed reference share coefficient.
Note: Parameter value is not effective during emergency stop.
23.06
0...400%
Value in percent
SPEED ERROR
FILT
0...999999 ms
1 = 1 ms 0
188
Index
Name/Selection
Description
23.07
WINDOW INTG ON Activates the window control function. The window control,
together with selection ADD of parameter 26.01 TORQUE
SELECTOR, forms a speed supervision function for a torque
controlled drive.
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
OFF
432
See par.
50.01.
433
23.08
0 = OFF
WINDOW WIDTH
POS
Defines the speed limit for the window control, when the
calculated speed error (speed reference - actual speed) is
positive. Window control is activated by parameter 23.07
WINDOW INTG ON.
Note: Window control speed limits (defined by par. 23.08 and
23.09) are forced to zero if the sum of 02.18 SPEED REF 4 and
23.09 WINDOW WIDTH NEG / 23.08 WINDOW WIDTH POS is
> 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or
< 20.01 MINIMUM SPEEED.
See also parameter 23.11 SYMMETRIC WINDOW.
This parameter is also used with speed controlled follower with
load share function as maximum output limiting. See chapter
Control block diagrams in section Speed reference ramp.
Speed limit
189
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
23.09
WINDOW WIDTH
NEG
Defines the speed limit for the window control, when the
calculated speed error (speed reference - actual speed) is
negative. Window control is activated by parameter 23.07
WINDOW INTDG ON.
See par.
50.01.
434
SPEED STEP
Defines an additional speed step given to the input of the speed See par.
controller (added to the speed error value). See control block
50.01.
diagram in section Speed control on page 305.
435
1=1
436
1=1
0=
OFF
23.10
23.11
23.12
See par.
20.01...20.02 (rpm)
SYMMETRIC
WINDOW
0 = OFF
Inactive
1 = ON
Active
RFE SPEED
FILTER
Note: When tuning the filter, the user should have basic
understanding of frequency filters. Incorrect tuning of the
parameters may amplify mechanical oscillations and cause
damage to the drive hardware. When the filter configuration
parameters are changed, it is recommended that the inverter is
either stopped or that the filter is switched off to ensure stability
of the speed controller.
1 = ON
Active
0 = OFF
Inactive
190
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
23.13
FREQUENCY OF
ZERO
10 =
1 Hz
45
Frequency response
20
20log10|H()|
-20
-40
-60
0
50
100
150
f / Hz
23.14
0.5...500 Hz
Zero frequency
DAMPING OF
ZERO
fzero = 45 Hz
zero = 0.25
pole = 1
20log10|H()|
-20
fzero = 45 Hz
zero = 0
pole = 1
-40
-60
0
50
100
150
f / Hz
Note: To ensure that the resonance frequency band is filtered,
not amplified, DAMPING OF ZERO must be smaller than
DAMPING OF POLE (parameter 23.16).
-1...1
Damping coefficient
191
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
23.15
FREQUENCY OF
POLE
10 =
1 Hz
40
0.25
40
fzero = 45 Hz
fpole = 50 Hz
20
20log10|H()|
PB
zero = 0
pole = 0.25
0
fzero = 45 Hz
-20
fzero = 45 Hz
fpole = 30 Hz
fpole = 40 Hz
zero = 0
-40
zero = 0
pole = 0.25
pole = 0.25
-60
100
50
f / Hz
Note: If this parameter value is very different from parameter
23.13 FREQUENCY OF ZERO value, the frequencies near the
FREQUENCY OF POLE are amplified, which may cause
damage to the driven machine.
23.16
0.5...500 Hz
Frequency of pole
DAMPING OF
POLE
20log10|H()|
20
zero = 0
pole = 0.05
0
-20
-40
fzero = 45 Hz
fzero = 45 Hz
fpole = 40 Hz
fpole = 40 Hz
zero = 0
pole = 0.75
zero = 0
pole = 0.25
-60
0
50
100
f / Hz
Note: To ensure that the resonance frequency band is filtered,
not amplified, DAMPING OF POLE must be higher than
DAMPING OF ZERO (parameter 23.14).
23.17
-1...1
Damping coefficient
RAMPED INCH
REF
Speed reference. 07.02 Auxiliary Control Word 1 bit 12 selects See par.
the used speed reference: 23.17 RAMPED INCH REF or 02.27 50.01.
USED SPEED REF.
442
192
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
23.18
Defines the correction term for the load share function used
with speed controlled Follower drives. I.e. defines how
accurately the Follower drive follows the Master torque.
A greater value results in a more accurate performance.
10 = 1%
0%
443
444
OFF
451
See parameter 23.19 FOLL SPD COR MODE and section Load
share function with speed controlled Follower on page 110.
Note: Parameter 24.02 DROOP RATE setting must be 0.
23.19
0...100%
Value in percent
Selects the torque correction mode for the load share function 1 = 1
used with speed controlled Follower drives. Used together with
parameter 23.18 FOLL SPD CTRL COR.
1 = FAST
2 = SLOW
24 SPEED CONTROL
+
-
+
+
+
+
KPS
Td s
fs+1
b
+
-
PI TUNE
0 = OFF
Inactive
1 = ON
Active
193
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
24.02
DROOP RATE
Defines the droop rate. The correct droop rate for a process
must be found out case by case in practice.
10 = 1%
452
10
453
100%
Drooping
} Par. 24.02
DROOP RATE
100%
0...100%
KPS
Defines the relative gain of the speed controller. Great gain may 100 = 1
cause speed oscillation.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an
error step when the error remains constant.
%
Gain = KPS = 1
TIS = Integration time = 0
Td= Derivation time = 0
Error value
Controller
output = KPS e
Controller output
e = Error value
t
0...250
194
Index
Name/Selection
24.04
KPS MIN
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
100 = 1
10
454
100 =
1%
455
456
OFF
457
100
458
KPS MIN
(par. 25.04)
24.05
TORQUE REF 5
(par. 02.12)
0...150
KPS WEAKPOINT
24.06
KPS WP FILT TIME Softens the rate of the change of the gain.
24.07
0...999999 ms
1 = 1 ms 100
24.08
0 = OFF
Disabled
1 = ON
Enabled
SET POINT
WEIGHT
30...100%
Setpoint weighting
1 = 1%
195
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
24.09
TIS
2.5
459
100 =
1%
460
100 =
1%
461
Controller output
Gain = KPS = 1
TIS = Integration time > 0
Td= Derivation time = 0
KPS e
e = Error value
KPS e
TI
24.10
24.11
0.01...1000 s
Integration time
See par.
20.06...20.05 (%)
BAL REF
See par.
20.06...20.05 (%)
196
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
24.12
DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. Derivative
1 = 1 ms 0
action boosts the controller output if the error value changes.
The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller
output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is set
to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as
a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more
responsive for disturbances.
PB
462
463
KPS Td
Controller Output
e
KPS e
Ts
Error Value
e = Error value
KPS e
TIS
0...10000 ms
24.13
Derivation time
0...100000 ms
1 = 1 ms 8
197
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
24.14
10 = 1 s
464
1 = 1 ms 8
465
466
Acceleration compensation
24.15
24.16
0...1000 s
ACC COMPFILT
TIME
0...999999 ms
Time
SLIP GAIN
Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control.
1 = 1%
100% means full slip compensation; 0% means no slip
compensation. The default value is 100%. Other values can be
used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip
compensation.
100
198
Index
Name/Selection
Description
24.17
KPS TIS MIN FREQ Defines the minimum motor frequency limit above which the
relative gain and integration time are defined by parameters
24.19 KPS VAL MIN FREQ and 24.20 TIS VAL MIN FREQ.
FbEq
Def.
PB
100 =
1 Hz
467
11.7
468
1 = 1%
100
469
1 = 1%
100
470
100 =
1%
476
1 = 1 ms 0
477
10 = 1%
478
KPS
TIS
0...200 Hz
Frequency
24.18
Defines the frequency at which KPS (gain) and TIS (integration 100 =
time) become constant. See parameter 24.17 KPS TIS MIN
1 Hz
FREQ.
0...200 Hz
Frequency
24.19
100...500%
24.20
TIS VAL MIN FREQ Defines the integral time at speed defined by 24.17 KPS TIS
MIN FREQ.
100...500%
25 TORQUE REF
25.01
TORQUE REF A
-327327%
Torque reference A
25.02
Defines the low pass filter time constant for TORQUE REF A
(25.01).
0...60000 ms
25.03
LOAD SHARE
-400...400%
100
199
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
25.04
TORQUE REF B
100 =
1%
479
100 =
1s
480
100 =
1s
481
482
501
25.06
25.07
-327327%
Torque reference B
TORQ RAMP UP
0...120 s
TORQ RAMP
DOWN
0...120 s
Defines the filter time constant for signal 01.07 MOTOR TORQ 1 = 1 ms 100
FILT2.
2...20000 ms
26 TORQUE REF
HANDLING
26.01
TORQUE
SELECTOR
1 = ZERO
2 = SPEED
Speed control
3 = TORQUE
Torque control
5 = MAXIMUM
200
Index
Name/Selection
Description
6 = ADD
FbEq
Def.
PB
100 =
1%
502
100 =
1%
503
1=1
OFF
504
100 =
1 Hz
31
505
506
507
508
LOAD
COMPENSATION
26.03
See par.
20.06...20.05 (%)
Load compensation
TORQUE STEP
26.04
26.05
See par.
20.06...20.05 (%)
Torque step
OSC
COMPENSATION
0 = ON
Active
1 = OFF
Inactive
OSCILLATION
FREQ
0...60 Hz
Oscillation frequency
OSCILLATION
PHASE
0...360
Oscillation phase
26.07
OSCILLATION
GAIN
Defines how much the output of the filter is amplified before it is 100 =
added to torque reference. Oscillation gain is scaled according 1%
to the speed controller gain so that changing the gain will not
disturb oscillation damping. This scaling is not effective when
DC VOLTAGE is selected to input.
0...100%
Oscillation gain
26.08
OSC COMP INPUT Determines the input signal for oscillation damping function.
26.06
1 = 1.41 0
1 =1
201
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
1 = DC VOLTAGE
27 FLUX CONTROL
27.01
FLUX
OPTIMIZATION
1 = YES
Active
27.02
0 = NO
Inactive
FLUX BRAKING
Def.
PB
1
1=1
NO
526
1=1
OFF
527
10 = 1%
100
528
10 = 1%
140
529
10 = 1%
25
530
531
OFF
533
27.03
27.04
27.05
27.06
27.08
1 = YES
Active
0 = NO
Inactive
FLUX REF
See par.
27.05...27.04 (%)
Flux reference
FLUX MAX
100...140%
Maximum flux
FLUX MIN
0...100%
Minimum flux
1=1
This parameter can be used to speed up the slope of the flux
reference and it is needed only, when very fast (e.g. 24 s)
acceleration or deceleration is required in the process. The
value increment effects to faster flux reference changes. If very
fast acceleration or deceleration is required the value 10 is
suitable for most applications.
0...128
HEX FIELD
WEAKEN
1 = ON
0 = OFF
1=1
202
Index
Name/Selection
28 MOTOR MODEL
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
551
552
40
553
554
555
28.01
ZER_COEF1
28.02
0...100%
Zero coefficient 1
ZER_GAIN
28.03
0...100%
Zero gain
MOT_COEF
28.04
0...100%
GEN_COEF
28.05
0...100%
Coefficient
MG_COEF
0...100%
Coefficient
1 = 1%
203
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
28.06
CABLE LENGTH
1=1m
10
556
1=1
ON
557
558
25
559
560
28.08
0...1000 m
LONG DISTANCE
MOD
1 = ON
Active
0 = OFF
Inactive
TR TUNE
28.09
-60...200%
RS INC1
RS INC1
(par. 28.09)
RS INC2
(par. 28.10)
f / Hz
0
28.10
10 = 1%
1,25 fN
-60...100%
RS INC2
-60...100%
204
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
28.11
CALC CURRENT
CORR
10 = 1%
100
561
1 = 1%
50%
562
25
563
ON
564
Set
during
ID run.
565
5...100%
FLYSTART CUR
REF [%]
28.13
0...100%
Value in percent
FLYSTART INIT
DLY
28.14
0...59
Delay
FS METHOD
1=1
28.15
1 = ON
Active
0 = OFF
Inactive
RS20 [mOhm]
28676 =
By increasing the default value defined during ID run (does not 1
include the temperature dependence of the resistance), the
motor model can be fine tuned especially in applications where
the motor or ambient temperature is not measured.
Note: If stator resistance value is too high, the desired starting
torque cannot be achieved.
0...x m
205
Index
Name/Selection
29 SCALAR
CONTROL
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
100 =
1 Hz
576
See
par.
20.01.
577
See
par.
20.02.
578
29.01
29.02
29.03
FREQUENCY REF
See Par.
29.0329.02 (Hz)
Frequency reference
FREQUENCY MAX Defines the maximum frequency. If parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM 100 =
SPEED is changed, this parameter value is also changed.
1 Hz
-300...300 Hz
Maximum frequency
FREQUENCY MIN
-300...300 Hz
Minimum frequency
100 =
1 Hz
206
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
29.04
IR
COMPENSATION
100 = 1
579
100 =
1 Hz
580
100%
15%
29.05
f (Hz)
0...30%
-500+500 Hz
207
Index
Name/Selection
Description
29.06
FbEq
Def.
PB
100 =
1 Hz
581
582
601
26.03 IR
COMPENSATION
f (Hz)
26.04 IR STEP-UP
FREQ
Field weakening
point (FWP)
For more information, see the Sine Filters Users Manual for
ACS800 Drives [3AFE68389178 (English)].
050 Hz
29.07
Value in Hz
ENA INC SW FREQ Activates the minimum switching frequency limitation with sine
filter application.
NO
Inactive
YES
30 FAULT
FUNCTIONS
30.01
MOT THERM P
MODE
1=1
Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one
motor is connected to the inverter.
See section Motor thermal mode on page 84.
208
Index
30.02
Name/Selection
Description
1 = DTC
2 = USER MODE
MOTOR THERM
PROT
1 = FAULT
2 = WARNING
3 = NO
Inactive
FbEq
Def.
PB
602
209
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
30.03
1 = NOT IN USE
Inactive
2 = 1xPT100
3 = 2xPT100
4 = 3xPT100
5 = 1...3 PTC
Def.
PB
603
110C
or 0
604
Ohm
4000
1330
Temperature
PTC resistance
Normal
01.5 kohm
Excessive
> 4 kohm
550
100
T
Constant current: 1.6 mA (0...10 V range with RAIO).
30.04
6 = EXT TEMP
1 = 1C
or 1
210
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
130C
or 0
605
606
110C
or 0
607
130C
or 0
608
MOT 1 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement 1 = 1C
activated by parameter 30.03 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL. Fault
or 1
MOTOR TEMP M is generated when the limit is exceeded.
-10...180C (Pt100) Limit in C or
/ 0...5000 ohm
(PTC / KTY84-1xx)
30.06
30.07
1 = NOT IN USE
Inactive
2 = 1xPT100
3 = 2xPT100
4 = 3xPT100
5 = 1...3 PTC
MOT 2 TEMP
ALM L
MOT 2 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature
1 = 1C
measurement function activated by parameter 30.06 MOT2
or 1
TEMP AI2 SEL. Fault MOTOR TEMP M is generated when the
limit is exceeded.
-10...180C (Pt100) Limit in C or
/ 0...5000 (PTC /
KTY84-1xx)
211
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
30.09
MOTOR THERM
TIME
Def.
PB
609
Motor
Load
100%
Temperature
100%
63%
400S
2700 s
400L
3600 s
450L
4200 s
500L
4800 s
560L
6000 s
all types
1500 s
212
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
30.10
MOTOR LOAD
CURVE
1 = 1%
100
610
1 = 1%
74
611
45
612
613
I / IN
(%)
I = Motor current
IN = Nominal motor current
150
Par. 30.10
100
50
Par. 30.11
Par. 30.12
30.11
50...150%
ZERO SPEED
LOAD
30.12
30.13
25...150%
BREAK POINT
Defines the break point frequency of the load curve i.e. the
100 =
point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the 1 Hz
value of parameter 30.10 MOTOR LOAD CURVE to the value
of parameter 30.11 ZERO SPEED LOAD. This parameter is
used when USER MODE is selected by parameter 30.01 MOT
THERM P MODE.
1...300 Hz
STALL FUNCTION
1 = NO
Inactive
2 = WARNING
3 = FAULT
213
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
30.14
STALL FREQ HI
100 =
1 Hz
20
614
0.150 Hz
Stall frequency
30.15
STALL TIME
Defines the time delay for the stall protection. See parameter
30.13 STALL FUNCTION.
1=1s
20
615
10...400 s
Stall time
30.16
UNDERLOAD
FUNC
616
1=1
600
617
618
TM = Motor torque
N = Nominal motor frequency
Underload curve
Underload region
f
0.1 fN
1 = NO
Protection is inactive.
2 = WARNING
3 = FAULT
30.17
UNDERLOAD TIME Time limit for the underload function. See parameter 30.16
UNDERLOAD FUNC.
0...600 s
Underload time
30.18
UNDERLOAD
CURVE
TM = Motor torque
TN= Nominal motor torque
N = Nominal motor frequency
80
70%
60
2
50%
40
5
30%
20
0
N
1...5
2.4 N
214
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
30.19
MOTOR PHASE
LOSS
1=1
NO
619
1 = FAULT
2 = NO
Inactive
EARTH FAULT
1=1
FAULT
620
FAULT
621
OFF
622
30.20
30.21
30.22
1 = FAULT
0 = WARNING
PANEL LOSS
1 = FAULT
0 = LAST SPEED
UNDERVOLTAGE
CTL
1 = ON
Active
0 = OFF
Inactive
1=1
215
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
30.23
OVERVOLTAGE
CTL
1=1
ON
623
NO
624
1=1
Inverter 625
type
dependent
1=1
ZERO
30.24
30.25
1 = ON
Active
0 = OFF
Inactive
PPCC FAULT
MASK
0 = NO
Inactive
1 = YES
Active
EARTH FAULT
LEVEL
30.26
Disabled
COMM LOSS RO
0 = ZERO
1 = LAST VALUE
216
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
30.27
AI<MIN FUNC
1 = FAULT
The drive trips on fault AI<MIN FUNC and the motor coasts to
stop.
2 = NO
Inactive
3 = LAST SPEED
30.28
0...300C
30.29
Defines the thermal model fault trip limit. See parameter 30.02
MOTOR THERM PROT. The calculated temperature of the
thermal model is shown by signal 01.18 MOTOR TEMP EST.
0...300C
30.30
Def.
PB
90
110
1 = 1C
80
1 = 1C
30
40
Temperature
Motor
nominal
temperature
rise
Ambient temperature
30.32
0...300C
AMBIENT TEMP
-40...100C
Ambient temperature
RS TEMP SCALE
1 = 1%
Defines the tuning coefficient for stator resistance Rs
temperature dependence, which is based on the temperature
measured with Pt100 sensors or on the internal motor thermal
protection model. The measured total resistance includes motor
cable and stator resistances. With pulse encoder feedback,
100% compensation can usually be used. Undercompensation
decreases the starting torque at high motor temperatures.
0...200%
Coefficient in percent
217
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
626
1=1
627
1=1
628
1 = FAULT
0 = FAULT
1 = ALARM
31 FAULT
FUNCTIONS
31.01
KLIXON MOT
OVER T
0 = FAULT
1 = ALARM
START INHIBIT
ALM
0 = OFF
Inactive
1 = ON
Active
0 = ALARM
31.02
31.03
31.04
34 BRAKE CHOPPER Control of the internal brake chopper with frames R2R6 and
R2iR5i.
34.01
34.02
34.03
Inactive
1 = ON
Active.
Note: Ensure the brake chopper and resistor(s) are installed
and the overvoltage control is switched off by parameter 30.23
OVERVOLTAGE CTL.
BR OVERLOAD
FUNC
0 = NO
Inactive
1 = WARNING
2 = FAULT
BR RESISTANCE
0 100 ohm
Resistance value
OFF
701
1=1
NO
702
1=1
100.00
703
218
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
34.04
BR THERM T
CONST
1=1
0.000
704
1=1
705
1=1
706
726
727
34.06
0...10000 s
Time constant
MAX CONT BR
POWER
0.01...10000 kW
Power
BC CONTROL
MODE
0 = AS
GENERATOR
35 MOTOR FAN CTRL Control logic and diagnostics of the motor fan.
The fan starter is controlled via a digital output. See parameter
group 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS. Signal 08.06 AUX STATUS
WORD 2 bit 0 (FAN ON CMD) must be used as a control bit.
An acknowledgement signal can be selected by parameter
10.06 MOTOR FAN ACK.
35.01
35.02
MOTOR FAN CTRL Activates the motor fan diagnostics and the timer functions. See
08.06 AUX STATUS WORD 2 bit 0.
1 = OFF
2 = ALARM
3 = ALARM/FAULT
2...300 s
Delay time
219
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
35.03
1=
1 min
20
728
0...100 min
Delay time
FAN ON DELAY
1=1s
729
0...100 s
Delay time
1=1
9999.9
751
10 = 1 s
85
752
1500
1001 R
1=1
1002 I
1=1
1003 I
1=1
2048
1004 R
35.04
36 MOTOR CABLE
PROTECTION
36.01
CABLE NOM
CURRENT
0...10000 A
Cable current
Note: The new value becomes valid only after the next RMIO
board power-up.
36.02
CABLE TEMP
CONST
Defines the loading time of the motor cable, i.e. time inside
which the cable current has reached 63% of the nominal cable
current defined by 36.01 CABLE NOM CURRENT.
This parameter enables the calculation of the motor cable
temperature, 01.27 CABLE TEMPERATURE. If the value
exceeds 102%, alarm CABLE TEMP is activated, and if the
value reaches 106%, fault and alarm CABLE TEMP are
activated.
050000 s
50 SPEED
MEASUREMENT
50.01
SPEED SCALING
0...100000 rpm
Speed reference
SPEED MEAS
MODE
0 = A_-B DIR
1 = A_-_
2 = A_-_B DIR
50.02
50.03
50.04
3 = A_-_B_-_
SPEED FB SEL
1 = INTERNAL
2 = ENCODER
ENCODER PULSE
NR
1...30000 ppr
220
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
50.05
ENCODER ALM/
FLT
1=1
ALAR
M
1005 B
50.06
50.07
1 = FAULT
0 = ALARM
Defines the time constant of the first order actual speed filter.
0...999999 ms
Time constant
POS COUNT
MODE
1 = 1 ms 4
1006 R
ROUN
D
1007 I
1008
1009
1010 R
0 = PULSE EDGES Both edges of the pulses are counted. Actual values can be
read from signals 03.07 POS COUNT LO and 03.08 POS
COUNT HI.
50.08
50.09
50.10
50.11
50.12
1 = ROUND&DEG
Position counter value (16 least significant bits) when par. 50.07 1 = 1
setting is PULSE EDGES. See section Position counter on
page 117.
0...65536
Value
Position counter value (16 most significant bits) when par 50.07 1 = 1
setting is PULSE EDGES. See section Position counter on
page 117.
0...65536
Value
ABOVE SPEED
LIMIT
Defines the supervision limit for the actual speed. When actual
speed has reached the limit, 08.01 MAIN STATUS WORD bit
10 value is set to 1.
See par.
20.01...20.02 rpm
ENCODER DELAY
1 = 1 ms 1000
Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function.
Supervision selected by parameter 50.05 ENCODER ALM/FLT
is activated if no pulses are received from the encoder within
the defined time when the drive is simultaneously at current or
torque limit.
0...50000 ms
MOTOR SP FILT
TIME
Defines the filter time constant for signal 01.01 MOTOR SPEED 1 = 1 ms 500
FILT.
2...20000 ms
See par.
50.01.
1011 R
1012 R
221
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
50.13
ZERO DETECT
DELAY
Defines the time the speed controller uses the last actual speed
value. This parameter can be adjusted to optimise the speed
regulator for the best possible performance at low speeds when
a pulse encoder is used and pulses are not received from the
pulse encoder during a 1 ms time period.
Def.
PB
1013 I
t1
speed
control
P-part
t1
0
t2
t2
t2
t2
222
Index
Name/Selection
Description
50.14
SPEED HOLD
TIME
Defines the time delay for the proportional part (P-part) of the
speed controller. After the time has elapsed and no pulses have
been received, the P-part is forced to zero.
FbEq
Def.
PB
1014 I
51 MASTER
ADAPTER (fieldbus
adapter)
51.01
FIELDBUS PAR1
1026 R
51.02
...
FIELDBUS PAR2
1027 R
...
...
51.33
FIELDBUS PAR33
52 STANDARD
MODBUS
...
R
52.01
STATION NUMBER Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same
address are not allowed on-line.
1...247
52.02
52.03
Address
BAUDRATE
1 = 600
600 bits/s
2 = 1200
1200 bits/s
3 = 2400
2400 bits/s
4 = 4800
4800 bits/s
5 = 9600
9600 bits/s
6 = 19200
19200 bits/s
PARITY
Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must
be used in all on-line stations.
1=
NONE1STOPBIT
223
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
2=
NONE2STOPBIT
3 = ODD
4 = EVEN
53 USER
PARAMETERS
53.01
NUMERIC 1
Def.
PB
NUMERIC 2
...
...
53.10
NUMERIC 10
53.11
STRING 1
0...9 characters
STRING 2
53.12
0...9 characters
...
...
...
53.24
STRING 14
0...9 characters
C
C
STATUS
1128
The table below shows the alternative bit states and the
corresponding values on the panel display.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
55.02
55.05
Display
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
80
Pb
Meaning
Stopped
Running
Faulted
Editing
Checking
Pushing
Popping
Initialising
FAULTED PAR
0...32768
Value
BLOCK1
0...32768
I
I
224
Index
Name/Selection
Description
55.06
INPUT1
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32768
FbEq
Def.
PB
INPUT2
INPUT3
55.09
OUTPUT
0...32768
No user-setting possible
BLOCK2
0...32768
INPUT1
55.10
55.11
I
I
INPUT2
55.13
INPUT3
55.14
55.15
...
OUTPUT
0...32768
No user-setting possible
BLOCK3
0...32768
...
...
55.104 OUTPUT
0...32768
I
I
225
Index
Name/Selection
56 ADAPT PROG1
CNTRL
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
56.01
56.02
ADAPT PROG
CMD
1 = STOP
2 = START
3 = EDIT
Stop to edit mode (i.e. the execution of the task is stopped for
editing) The program can be edited.
EDIT CMD
1 = NO
3 = DELETED
4 = PROTECT
5 = UNPROTECT
56.03
EDIT BLOCK
1...15
226
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
56.04
TIMELEVEL_SEL
56.05
PASS CODE
0 h...FFFFFF h
STATUS
1128
The table below shows the alternative bit states and the
corresponding values on the panel display.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
57.02
57.05
57.06
Display
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
80
Meaning
Stopped
Running
Faulted
Editing
Checking
Pushing
Popping
Initialising
FAULTED PAR
0...32768
Value
BLOCK 1
0...32768
INPUT 1
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32768
INPUT 2
Pb
I
I
227
Index
Name/Selection
Description
57.08
INPUT 3
57.09
OUTPUT
0...32768
No user-setting possible
BLOCK 2
0...32768
INPUT 1
FbEq
Def.
PB
57.10
57.11
I
I
INPUT 2
57.13
INPUT 3
57.14
57.15
...
OUTPUT
0...32768
No user-setting possible
BLOCK 3
0...32768
I
I
...
57.104 OUTPUT
0...32768
58 ADAPT PROG2
CNTRL
I
Stores and displays the output of Block 20.
No user-setting possible
Adaptive program task 2 control. The update time of task 2
control is 100 ms.
See parameter group 57 ADAPTIVE PROG2.
58.01
58.02
ADAPT PROG
CMD
1 = STOP
2 = START
3 = EDIT
EDIT CMD
1 = NO
2 = PUSH
3 = DELETED
228
Index
Name/Selection
Description
4 = PROTECT
FbEq
Def.
PB
58.03
EDIT BLOCK
1...15
58.04
TIMELEVEL_SEL
58.05
PASS CODE
0 h...FFFFFF h
66 AP CONNECT
66.01
START
Selects the source for the drive start in I/O control. (Connected
parallel with I/O start signals. See START/STOP function in
parameter group 10 DIGITAL INPUTS.)
-255.255.31: C 32768...255.255.31: C
32768
229
Index
Name/Selection
Description
66.15
EXT2 AO1
-255.255.31: C 32768...255.255.31: C
32768
EXT2 AO2
-255.255.31: C 32768...255.255.31: C
32768
66.16
70 DDCS CONTROL
FbEq
Def.
PB
T
P
70.01
1=1
1375 R
1=1
10
1376 R
1=1
1377 I
0...254
Node address
CH0 LINK
CONTROL
70.03
1...15
Light intensity
8 Mbit/s
4 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
1 Mbit/s
230
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
70.04
CH0 TIMEOUT
1 = 1 ms 100
0...60000 ms
1 = STOP
RAMPNG
2 = STOP TORQ
3 = COAST STOP
4 = LAST SPEED
70.05
Def.
PB
1378 R
1379 I
1=1
10
1380 R
1=1
1381 R
1382 I
1383 P
B
1384 R
CH1 LINK
CONTROL
70.07
70.08
70.09
1...15
Light intensity
1...125
Node address
1 = NOT IN USE
2 = MASTER
Master drive
3 = FOLLOWER
Follower drive
MASTER SIGNAL 1 In case of master drive this parameter selects the data which is 1 = 1
sent by the Master to the Follower drive(s) (to data set 41 index
1). In case of follower drive this parameter selects the data
which is sent from follower to master.
0...20000
70.10
MASTER SIGNAL 2 In case of master drive this parameter selects the data which is 1 = 1
sent by the Master to the Follower drive(s) (to data set 41 index
2). In case of follower drive this parameter selects the data
which is sent from follower to master.
0...20000
231
Index
Name/Selection
70.11
MASTER SIGNAL 3 In case of master drive this parameter selects the data which is 1 = 1
sent by the Master to the Follower drive(s) (to data set 41 index
2). The selected data can be scaled by parameter 70.30
MASTER SGN3 SCALE before it is sent to the Follower drive.
In case of follower drive this parameter selects the data which is
sent from follower to master.
70.12
Description
FbEq
0...20000
CH2 LINK
CONTROL
Def.
PB
1385 R
1=1
10
1386 R
1=1
100
1387 R
1388 I
1=1
1389 R
1=1
15
1390 R
With the maximum length of optic fiber cable, use value 15.
70.13
70.14
70.15
1...15
Light intensity
CH2 TIMEOUT
0...60000 ms
Time
1 = FAULT
0 = ALARM
70.16
1...254
CH3 LINK
CONTROL
70.17
70.18
1...15
Light intensity
0 = FOLLOWER
1 = MASTER
0 = FOLLOWER
FOLLO 1391 B
WER
MAST
ER
1392 B
232
Index
70.19
Name/Selection
Description
1 = MASTER
CH0 HW
CONNECTION
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
STAR
1=1
STAR
100%
70.20
70.29
70.30
0 = RING
1 = STAR
CH3 HW
CONNECTION
0 = RING
1 = STAR
FOLL DS SEL
1 = MASTER
2 = FOLL NODE 2
3 = FOLL NODE 3
4 = FOLL NODE 4
5 = FOLL NODE 5
6 = FOLL NODE 6
7 = FOLL NODE 7
MASTER SGN3
SCALE
0...1000%
Value in percent
10 = 1%
233
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
70.31
FOLLOW SGN3
SCALE
10 = 1%
100%
0...1000%
Value in percent
CH2 HW
CONNECTION
1=1
RING
0 = RING
1 = STAR
MAILBOX DS SEL
Selects the data set pair for mailbox use when parameter 98.02
COMM. MODULE setting is ADVANT/N-FB. See section Data
sets 10...33 on page 290.
0 = 32/33
1 = 24/25
FOLLOWER MCW
MASK
1=1
FFFF
Pb
70.32
70.33
70.34
PB
0...65535
70.35
FOLLOWER SEL
1 = FOLLOWER 2
2 = FOLLOWER 3
3 = FOLLOWER
2+3
4 = FOLLOWER 4
70.36
7 = FOLL 2+3+4
8 = NOT USED
3 = FAULT
234
Index
Name/Selection
Description
70.37
2 = MSW BIT 1
3 = MSW BIT0+1
4 = ALLWAYS
71 DRIVEBUS COMM
71.01
CH0 DRIVEBUS
MODE
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
1=1
NO
DDCS mode
1 =YES
DriveBus mode
DDCS link
External
control
system
CH0
RMIO/NAMC-xx
Address
assignment
Data set table of data sets
10
Group
12
90.01...90.18
91.01...91.09
14
AMC table
32
90.01
D SET 10 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
90.02
D SET 10 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 10 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 12 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
90.03
90.04
701
1735 I
1736 I
1737 I
1738 I
235
Index
Name/Selection
Description
90.05
D SET 12 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
90.06
D SET 12 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
90.07
D SET 14 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 14 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 14 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 16 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 16 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 16 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 18 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
90.14
D SET 18 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
90.15
D SET 18 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 20 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 20 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 20 VAL 3
90.08
90.09
90.10
90.11
90.12
90.13
90.16
90.17
90.18
0...9999
FbEq
Def.
PB
1739 I
1740 I
1741 I
1742 I
1743 I
1744 I
1745 I
1746 I
1747 I
1748 I
1749 I
1750 I
1751 I
1752 I
Parameter index
91.01
D SET 22 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
1753 I
236
Index
Name/Selection
Description
91.02
D SET 22 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
91.03
D SET 22 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
91.04
D SET 24 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 24 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 24 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
91.05
91.06
92 D SET TR ADDR
FbEq
Def.
PB
1754 I
1755 I
1756 I
1757 I
1758 I
Data sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master station.
The parameters in groups 92 and 93 are visible only when a
fieldbus communication is activated by setting parameter 98.02
COMM. MODULE to FIELDBUS or ADVANT/N-FB. For more
information, see chapter Fieldbus control.
DDCS link
External
control
system
CH0
RMIO/NAMC-xx
Address
assignment
Data set table of data sets
11
Group
13
92.01...92.18
93.01...93.09
15
AMC table
33
92.01
D SET 11 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 11 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
92.03
D SET 11 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
92.04
D SET 13 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 13 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
92.02
92.05
1771 I
1772 I
1773 I
1774 I
1775 I
237
Index
Name/Selection
Description
92.06
D SET 13 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
92.07
D SET 15 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
92.08
D SET 15 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 15 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 17 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
92.11
D SET 17 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
92.12
D SET 17 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 19 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 19 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
92.15
D SET 19 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
92.16
D SET 21 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 21 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 21 VAL 3
92.09
92.10
92.13
92.14
92.17
92.18
FbEq
93 D SET TR ADDR
93.01
D SET 23 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 23 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
93.02
Def.
PB
1776 I
1777 I
1778 I
1779 I
1780 I
1781 I
1782 I
1783 I
1784 I
1785 I
1786 I
1787 I
1788 I
1789 I
1790 I
238
Index
Name/Selection
Description
93.03
D SET 23 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
93.04
D SET 25 VAL 1
0...9999
Parameter index
93.05
D SET 25 VAL 2
0...9999
Parameter index
D SET 25 VAL 3
0...9999
Parameter index
93.06
95 LSU
FbEq
Def.
PB
1791 I
1792 I
1793 I
1794 I
95.01
30
P
Positive reference 30 denotes capacitive load.
Negative reference 30 denotes inductive load.
P = signal 01.09 POWER value
Parameter 24.02 values are converter to degrees by the
line-side converter application program: -3000...3000 =
-30...30. Values above 3000 or below -3000 equal to -30/30,
since the range is limited to -3000/3000.
-10000...10000
Reference value
See par.
description.
239
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
PB
95.02
1=1V
106
110
Acc. to
HW
type
0...1100 V
Voltage
0...10000
95.04
0...10000
95.05
1 = NO COMM
2 = LIMITED
F IE L D B U S
A D A P T E R
A C T IV E
S U P P L Y
U N IT
IN V E R T E R
U N IT
B it 0
R E F
9 5 .0 1
L S U D C R E F
9 5 .0 2
L S U Q
P O W
L IN E C O N V E R T E R
D R IV E T Y P E
M A IN C O N T R O L W O R D
L S U Q
IN T E R N A L
M C W
C O N T R O L
L S U P A R 1 S E L
9 5 .0 3
9 5 .0 4
R E F
L S U S T A T U S W O R D
0 8 .2 5
L S U P A R 2 S E L
P O W
L S U D C R E F
L S U S T A T U S W O R D
0 3 .3 2
L S U A C T S IG N A L S 2
0 3 .3 1
L S U A C T S IG N A L S 1
A D D R E S S
A S S IG N M E N T
O F D A T A
3 = WIDE
4 = WTA
240
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
95.06
1=1
97 DRIVE
97.01
DEVICE NAME
0...32 characters
E.g. Unwinder 1
PB
T
I
1861 C
ENCODER
MODULE
1901 I
16
3 = RTAC-SLOT2
4 = RTAC-DDCS
COMM. MODULE
Switch S1
C
DE F
9AB
6
4 5 78
2 = RTAC-SLOT1
Communication inactive
2
01
98.02
1 = NO
1902 I
241
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
1 = NO
2 = FIELDBUS
3 = ADVANT/N-FB
4 = STD MODBUS
Def.
PB
1903 I
1904 I
DI/O EXT
MODULE 1
98.04
1 = NO
Inactive
2 = REPLACE
3 = EXTEND
DI/O EXT
MODULE 2
1 = NO
Inactive
2 = REPLACE
3 = EXTENDED
242
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
4 = STEP UP
Def.
PB
1906 I
AI/O EXT
MODULE 1
Defines the signal type for the inputs and outputs of the RAIO/
NAIO Analogue I/O Extension module 1 or reserves the RAIO/
NAIO module for the motor temperature measurement function.
The input signal setting must match the signal connected to the
module. The input signal type can be selected with the
configuration DIP switch on the circuit board of the module.
For more information, see RAIO-01 Analogue I/O Extension
User's Manual [3AFE64484567 (English)] or NTAC/NDIO/NAIO
I/O Modules Installation and Start-up Guide [3AFY58919730
(English)].
Switch S2 (Operating mode) for RAIO-01
Analogue input AI1
Analogue input AI2
ON
ON
1 2
ON
ON
1 2
1 2
1 2
Input signal
0(4)20 mA
0(2)10 V
02 V
0(4)20 mA
0(2)10 V
02 V
(Default)
1 2
ON
3
1 2
ON
1 2
1 2
Voltage signal
0(2)10 V
ON
ON
1 2
Voltage signal
02 V
ON
3
1 2
Current signal
0(4)20 mA
(Default)
The analogue I/O extension module replaces AI1 and AI2 of the
RMIO board, and extends the outputs with AO3 and AO4.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter
98.11 AI/O EXT1 LOCATION.
1 = NO
Inactive
2 = UNIPOLAR AI
Unipolar
3 = BIBOLAR AI
Bipolar
4 = TEMP MEAS
243
Index
Name/Selection
Description
98.08
COMM PROFILE
ABB DRIVES
DI/O EXT1
LOCATION
98.09
FbEq
Def.
PB
1909 I
1910 I
Hardware filtering
Enabled
Disabled
ON
1 2
3 = RDIO-SLOT1
4 = RDIO-SLOT2
5 = RDIO-DDCS
DE F
9AB
45
67
DI/O EXT2
LOCATION
Switch S1
2
01
98.10
2 = NOT IN USE
Enabled
Hardware filtering
Disabled
ON
1 2
2 = NOT IN USE
Inactive
244
Description
3 = RDIO-SLOT1
4 = RDIO-SLOT2
5 = RDIO-DDCS
Def.
PB
1911 I
Switch S1
DE F
9AB
6
4 5 78
AI/O EXT1
LOCATION
FbEq
2
01
98.11
Name/Selection
Index
1 = NAIO-DDCS
3 = RAIO-SLOT1
4 = RAIO-SLOT2
5 = RAIO-DDCS
DE F
9AB
6
4 5 78
FUSE SWITCH
CTRL
Switch S1
2
01
98.12
2 = NOT IN USE
0 = OFF
1 = ON
1=1
Type
depend
ent
245
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
98.13
Def.
PB
The input signal setting must match the signal connected to the
module. The input signal type can be selected by using the
configuration DIP switch on the circuit board of the module:
Switch S2 (Operating mode) for RAIO-01
Analogue input AI1
Analogue input AI2
ON
ON
1 2
ON
1 2
1 2
ON
3
1 2
Input signal
0(4)20 mA
0(2)10 V
02 V
0(4)20 mA
0(2)10 V
02 V
(Default)
1 2
ON
3
ON
1 2
Voltage signal
0(2)10 V
ON
3
ON
1 2
1 2
1 2
Voltage signal
02 V
ON
3
1 2
Current signal
0(4)20 mA
(Default)
Unipolar
2 = BIBOLAR AI1
Bipolar
98.14
Defines the signal type for input AI2 of the RAIO Analogue I/O
Extension module 2. See parameter 98.13 AI1 EXT2 MODE.
98.15
AI/O EXT2
LOCATION
2 = NOT IN USE
Communication inactive
3 = RAIO-SLOT1
246
Name/Selection
Description
4 = RAIO-SLOT2
5 = RAIO-DDCS
Def.
PB
1926 I
1927 R
Switch S1
DE F
9AB
2
01
6
4 5 78
99 START-UP DATA
FbEq
Index
99.01
99.02
LANGUAGE
0 = ENGLISH
British English
1 = ENGLISH AM
Not available
2 = DEUTSCH
German
3 = ITALIANO
Not available
4 = ESPANOL
Not available
5 = PORTUGUES
Not available
6 = NEDERLANDS
Not available
7 = FRANCAIS
Not available
8 = DANSK
Not available
9 = SUOMI
Not available
10 = SVENSKA
Not available
11 = CESKY
Not available
12 = POLSKI
Not available
13 = PO-RUSSKI
Not available
MOTOR NOM
VOLTAGE
1/2...2 UN V
1=1V
247
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
Def.
99.03
MOTOR NOM
CURRENT
PB
1928 R
99.04
99.05
MOTOR NOM
FREQ
8...300 Hz
MOTOR NOM
SPEED
100 =
1 Hz
50
1929 R
1=
1 rpm
1930 R
10 =
1 kW
1931 R
1932 I
99.07
1...18000 rpm
MOTOR NOM
POWER
0...9000 kW
MOTOR ID RUN
1 = NO
248
Index
Name/Selection
Description
2 = STANDARD
3 = REDUCED
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
DTC
1933 B
MOTOR CTRL
MODE
1 = SCALAR
0 = DTC
249
Index
Name/Selection
Description
99.09
APPLIC RESTORE Restores the original settings of the active application macro,
99.11 APPLICATION MACRO.
FbEq
Def.
PB
1=1
1934 B
1935 I
99.10
0 = NO
No restoring
1 = YES
Restoring
DRIVE ID NUMBER Defines the ID number of the drive. This parameter requires
support from an external control system.
0...32767
ID number
250
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
99.11
APPLICATION
MACRO
Def.
PB
1936 I
0.7
1937 R
parameter
change
RAM memory
POWER-UP
USER 1
LOAD
USER 2
LOAD
FACTORY
Par. 16.06
Parameter file
USER MACRO 1 file
USER 1
SAVE
USER 2
SAVE
99.12
1 = FACTORY
2 = USER 1 LOAD
Loads User 1 macro into use. Before loading, check that the
saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for
the application.
3 = USER 1 SAVE
4 = USER 2 LOAD
Loads User 2 macro into use. Before loading, check that the
saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for
the application.
5 = USER 2 SAVE
MOTOR NOM COS Defines the cos. Must be equal to the value on the motor
FII
rating plate.
0.3...1
Cos
100 =
Cosfii1
251
Index
Name/Selection
Description
FbEq
99.13
POWER IS GIVEN
0 = COSFII
1 = POWER
Power
Def.
PB
1938 B
252
253
Fault tracing
What this chapter contains
This chapter lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible causes and
corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. Read the
Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual or the
safety manual before you work on the drive.
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or
fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been
removed, the motor can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the fault history. The latest faults and alarms
are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected. See
section Fault and event loggers on page 121 and chapter Control panel for more
information.
Fault tracing
254
Abbreviations
AW
Alarm Word
LW
Limit Word
MSW
FW
SFW
AP AFW
Fault tracing
255
Cause
What to do
ACS800 TEMP
(4210)
09.04 AW 1 bit 4
ANALOG IO
(5441)
09.04 AW 1 bit 8
AI<MIN FUNC
(8110)
09.05 AW 2 bit 10
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.27)
ALM (xx)
AP PRG ERR
(FFD6)
BATT FAILURE
(5581)
09.05 AW 2 bit 12
BR OVERHEAT
(7112)
CABLE TEMP
(4080)
09.05 AW 2 bit 3
CALIBRA DONE
(FF37)
Fault tracing
256
Alarm
Cause
What to do
CALIBRA REQ
(FF36)
Start drive.
09.04 AW 1 bit 11
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 70.14)
COMM MODULE
(7510)
09.05 AW 2 bit 11
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 70.04 and
70.05)
DC UNDERVOLT
(3220)
Only indication
09.05 AW 2 bit 14
DIGITAL IO
(5442)
09.04 AW 1 bit 7
EARTH FAULT
(2330)
09.04 AW 1 bit 14
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.20)
Fault tracing
257
Alarm
Cause
What to do
EM STOP
(F081)
09.04 AW 1 bit 1
EM STOP DEC
(F082)
09.04 AW 1 bit 13
ENCODER A<>B
(7302)
09.05 AW 2 bit 4
ENCODER ERR
(7301)
09.04 AW 1 bit 5
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 50.05)
EXT AIO
(7081)
09.04 AW 1 bit 10
EXT DIO
(7082)
09.04 AW 1 bit 9
FAN OVERTEMP
(FF83)
FOLLOWER FLT
(FF7E)
ID DONE
(FF32)
Fault tracing
258
Alarm
Cause
What to do
ID MAGN
(FF31)
ID MAGN REQ
(FF30)
ID N CHANGED
(FF68)
INV DISABLED
(3200)
Close DC switch.
09.02 FW 2 bit 4
08.20 INV
ENABLED WORD
INV OVERLOAD
(5481)
Check load.
I/O SP REF
(7281)
KLIXON
(4311)
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 31.01)
Check cable.
Check PTC thermistor and thermal switch /
thermistor relay connections.
If thermistor resistance is over 4 kohm, motor
temperature is too high. Wait for motor to cool
down. State of DI6 returns back to 1 when
thermistor resistance is between 0...1.5 kohm.
Replace I/O board if voltage of selected digital
input for thermal switch / thermistor relay is
correct, but state of DI6 is 0 (01.15 DI6-1
STATUS or 08.05 DI STATUS WORD).
Check parameter 10.05 KLIXON setting.
Check Fault Function parameter.
Fault tracing
259
Alarm
Cause
What to do
LSU TEMP
(4292)
MACRO CHANGE
(FF69)
M/F CONNECT
(7582)
MOD BOARD T
(FF88)
09.11 AW 3 bit 14
MOD CHOKE T
(FF89)
09.11 AW 3 bit 13
MOTOR FAN
(7083)
09.05 AW 2 bit 0
MOTOR STALL
(7121)
MOTOR STARTS
(FF34)
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
09.05 AW 2 bit 9
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.13...30.15)
09.04 AW 1 bit 3
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.02)
Fault tracing
260
Alarm
Cause
What to do
MOTOR TEMP M
(4312)
09.04 AW 1 bit 2
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.04 or 30.07)
MPROT SWITCH
(4315)
09.04 AW 1 bit 12
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 31.04)
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
09.05 AW 2 bit 13
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.21)
POWDOWN FILE
(FFA5)
Check cooling.
Change fan.
09.05 AW 2 bit 8
POWFAIL FILE
(FFA0)
09.05 AW 2 bit 7
PP OVERLOAD
(5482)
08.07 LW 1 bit 5
REPLACE FAN
(4280)
Fault tracing
261
Alarm
Cause
What to do
RESTARTED
(1086)
Only indication
09.05 AW 2 bit 15
SAFETY SWITCH
(7084)
09.04 AW 1 bit 15
START INHIBI
(FF7A)
09.04 AW 1 bit 0
TEMP DIF x y
(4380)
09.11 AW 3 bit 15
09.18 TEMP DIF
ALM WORD
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 31.03)
UNDERLOAD
(FF6A)
09.05 AW 2 bit 1
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.16...30.18)
Fault tracing
262
Cause
What to do
DOWNLOADING
FAILED
DRIVE
INCOMPATIBLE
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
DRIVE IS
RUNNING
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
NO
COMMUNICATION
NO FREE ID
NUMBERS
ID NUMBER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
NOT UPLOADED
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
UPLOADING
FAILED
WRITE ACCESS
DENIED
PARAMETER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
Fault tracing
263
Alarms by number
Alarm
number
Alarm name
Alarm
number
Alarm name
Alarm
number
Alarm name
1086
RESTARTED
7121
MOTOR STALL
FF91
T MEAS CIRC
1087
SYSTEM START
7281
I/O SP REF
FFA0
POWFAIL FILE
2212
7301
ENCODER ERR
FFA3
BACKUP USED
2300
7302
ENCODER A<>B
FFA5
POWDOWN FILE
2330
EARTH FAULT
7510
COMM MODULE
FFD6
AP PRG ERR
3200
INV DISABLED
7520
3211
DC BUS LIM
7582
M/F CONNECT
3220
DC UNDERVOLT
8110
AI<MIN FUNC
3381
POWER FAIL
F081
EM STOP
4080
CABLE TEMP
F082
EM STOP DEC
4210
ACS TEMP x y
FF30
ID MAGN REQ
4210
ACS800 TEMP
FF31
ID MAGN
4280
REPLACE FAN
FF32
ID DONE
4292
LSU TEMP
FF33
ID RUN SEL
4310
MOTOR TEMP
FF34
MOTOR STARTS
4311
KLIXON
FF35
ID RUN
4312
MOTOR TEMP M
FF36
CALIBRA REQ
4315
MPROT SWITCH
FF37
CALIBRA DONE
4380
TEMP DIF x y
FF38
HW RECONF RQ
5300
PANEL LOSS
FF39
'--> POWEROFF
5441
ANALOG IO
FF68
ID N CHANGED
5442
DIGITAL IO
FF69
MACRO CHANGE
5481
INV OVERLOAD
FF6A
UNDERLOAD
5482
PP OVERLOAD
FF7A
START INHIB
5581
BATT FAILURE
FF7F
SWC ON INHIB
7081
EXT AIO
FF83
FAN OVERTEMP
7082
EXT DIO
FF85
7083
MOTOR FAN
FF86
7084
SAFETY SWITCH
FF87
SYNCRO SPEED
7112
BR OVERHEAT
FF88
MOD BOARD T
7114
BC OVERHEAT
FF89
MOD CHOKE T
Fault tracing
264
Cause
What to do
ACS800 TEMP
(4210)
09.01 FW 1 bit 3
ACS TEMP x y
(4210)
09.01 FW 1 bit 3
09.16 OVERTEMP
WORD
AI<MIN FUNC
(8110)
09.02 FW 2 bit 10
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.27)
BACKUP ERROR
(FFA2)
Retry.
Check connections.
Check that parameters are compatible with
drive.
BC OVERHEAT
(7114)
BC SHORT CIR
(7113)
BR BROKEN
(7110)
BR OVERHEAT
(7112)
BR WIRING
(7111)
Fault tracing
265
Fault
Cause
What to do
CABLE TEMP
(4080)
09.02 FW 2 bit 3
CHOKE OTEMP
(FF82)
09.06 FAULT
WORD3 bit 8
09.01 FW 1 bit 11
(programmable
Fault function, see
Par. 70.14)
COMM MODULE
(7510)
09.02 FW 2 bit 12
(programmable
Fault function, see
Par. 70.04 and
70.05)
CTRL B TEMP
(4110)
09.02 FW 2 bit 7
CURR MEAS
(2211)
Fault tracing
266
Fault
Cause
What to do
CUR UNBAL x
(2330)
09.13 CURRENT
UNBALANCE
09.01 FW 1 bit 4
DC HIGH RUSH
(FF80)
09.06 FW 3 bit 11
09.01 FW 1 bit 2
U1max
415 V
500 V
690 V
UDC overvoltage
trip limit
728 V DC
877 V DC
1210 V DC
DDF FORMAT
(FFA6)
09.03 SFW bit 3
Fault tracing
U1min
380 V
380 V
525 V
UDC undervoltage
trip limit
308 V DC
308 V DC
425 V DC
Replace RMIO board.
267
Fault
Cause
What to do
EARTH FAULT
(2330)
09.01 FW 1 bit 4
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.20)
ENCODER A<>B
(7302)
09.06 FW 3 bit 10
ENCODER ERR
(7301)
09.02 FW 2 bit 5
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 50.05)
Earth fault level can be sensitive with nonparallel-connected R8i inverter modules with
long motor cables.
FACTORY FILE
(FFA7)
GD DISABLED X
(FF53)
09.06 FW 3 bit 6
Fault tracing
268
Fault
Cause
What to do
ID RUN FAIL
(FF84)
ILLEGAL
INSTRUCTION
(FF5F)
INV DISABLED
(3200)
09.02 FW 2 bit 4
Fault tracing
Close DC switch.
DC switch status of each parallel-connected
inverter module can be monitored by signal
08.20 INV ENABLED WORD.
If DC switch is not included in drive system,
deactivate this function by Par. 98.12 FUSE
SWITCH CTRL. Note: With R7i inverter units
equipped with charging option +F272
monitoring must be active.
269
Fault
Cause
What to do
IO COMM ERR
(7000)
09.02 FW 2 bit 6
LSU CHARGING
(3284)
In LSU:
LSU COMM
(7581)
LSU DC OVOLT
(3283)
Fault tracing
270
Fault
Cause
What to do
LSU DC UVOLT
(3282)
LSU EARTH F
(2383)
05.11 LSU FAULT
WORD bit 12
Internal fault
Fault tracing
271
Fault
Cause
What to do
LSU OVERCURR
(2380)
LSU OVERTEMP
(4291)
05.11 LSU FAULT
WORD bit 3
LSU SC
(2381)
LSU START
(FF97)
LSU SYNCHRO
(8180)
LINE CONV
(FF51)
09.06 FW 3 bit 3
MOD BOARD T
(FF88)
09.06 FW 3 bit 14
Fault tracing
272
Fault
Cause
What to do
MOD CHOKE T
(FF89)
09.06 FW 3 bit 13
MOTOR FAN
(7083)
09.06 FW 3 bit 0
MOTOR PHASE
(FF56)
09.02 FW 2 bit 15
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.19).
MOTOR STALL
(7121)
09.02 FW 2 bit 14
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.13...30.15)
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
09.01 FW 1 bit 6
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.02)
Fault tracing
273
Fault
Cause
What to do
MOTOR TEMP M
(4312)
09.01 FW 1 bit 5
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.05 or 30.08)
MPROT SWITCH
(4315)
09.01 FW 1 bit 10
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 31.04)
NO MOTOR DATA
(FF52)
09.02 FW 2 bit 1
NVOS ERROR
(FFA8)
09.03 SFW bit 2
OVERFREQ
(7123)
09.01 FW1 bit 9
OVER SWFREQ
(FF55)
09.02 FW 2 bit 8
Fault tracing
274
Fault
Cause
What to do
OVERCURRENT
(2310)
09.01 FW 1 bit 1
OVERCURR x
(2310)
09.01 FW 1 bit 1
09.14
OVERCURRENT
WORD
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
09.02 FW 2 bit 13
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.21)
PARAM CRC
(6320)
POWERFAIL
(3381)
Fault tracing
275
Fault
Cause
What to do
POWF INV x
(3381)
PPCC LINK
(5210)
09.02 FW 2 bit 11
PPCC LINK xx
(5210)
09.02 FW 2 bit 11
PP OVERLOAD
(5482)
08.07 LIMIT WORD
INV bit 5
RUN DISABLE
(FF54)
09.02 FW2 bit 4
Check cooling.
Fault tracing
276
Fault
Cause
What to do
SHORT CIRC
(2340)
09.01 FW 1 bit 0
09.15 SHORT
CIRC FAULT
START INHIBI
(FF7A)
08.21 START
INHIBI WORD for
ACS800
09.06 FW 3 bit 5
SUPPLY PHASE
(3130)
09.02 FW 2 bit 0
TEMP DIF x y
(4380)
09.06 FW 3 bit 15
09.17 TEMP DIF
FLT WORD
T MEAS CIRC
(FF91)
09.06 FW 3 bit 4
Replace fan.
Check air filters.
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 31.03)
UNDERLOAD
(FF6A)
09.01 FW 1 bit 8
(programmable
Fault Function, see
Par. 30.16...30.18)
USER MACRO
(FFA1)
09.03 SFW bit 1
Fault tracing
277
Faults by number
Fault
number
Fault name
Fault
number
Fault name
Fault
number
Fault name
1080
4080
CABLE TEMP
7112
BR OVERHEAT
1081
4110
CTRL B TEMP
7113
BC SHORT CIR
1082
4210
ACS800 TEMP
7114
BC OVERHEAT
1083
LSU INTERNAL
4210
ACS TEMP x y
7121
MOTOR STALL
1086
RESTARTED
4280
REPLACE FAN
7123
OVERFREQ
1087
SYSTEM START
4290
INV OVERTEMP
7281
I/O SP REF
2211
CURR MEAS
4291
LSU OVERTEMP
7301
ENCODER ERR
2212
4292
LSU TEMP
7302
ENCODER A<>B
2300
4310
MOTOR TEMP
7510
COMM MODULE
2310
OVERCURR x
4311
KLIXON
7520
2310
OVERCURRENT
4312
MOTOR TEMP M
7581
LSU COMM
3211
DC BUS LIM
4315
MPROT SWITCH
7582
M/F CONNECT
2330
CUR UNBAL
4380
TEMP DIF
8110
AI<MIN FUNC
2330
CUR UNBAL x
4380
TEMP DIF x y
8180
LSU SYNCHRO
2330
EARTH FAULT
5210
PPCC LINK
F081
EM STOP
2340
SC INV x y
5210
PPCC LINK xx
F082
EM STOP DEC
2340
SHORT CIRC
5300
PANEL LOSS
FF30
ID MAGN REQ
2380
LSU OVERCURR
5410
INT CONFIG
FF31
ID MAGN
2381
LSU SC
5441
ANALOG IO
FF32
ID DONE
2383
LSU EARTH F
5442
DIGITAL IO
FF33
ID RUN SEL
2384
LSU MAIN BR
5481
INV OVERLOAD
FF34
MOTOR STARTS
3130
SUPPLY PHASE
5482
PP OVERLOAD
FF35
ID RUN
3200
INV DISABLED
5581
BATT FAILURE
FF36
CALIBRA REQ
3210
DC OVERVOLT
6320
PARAM CRC
FF37
CALIBRA DONE
3220
DC UNDERVOLT
7000
IO COMM ERR
FF38
HW RECONF RQ
3282
LSU DC UVOLT
7081
EXT AIO
FF39
'--> POWEROFF
3283
LSU DC OVOLT
7082
EXT DIO
FF51
LINE CONV
3284
LSU CHARGING
7083
MOTOR FAN
FF52
NO MOTOR DATA
3285
7084
SAFETY SWITCH
FF53
GD DISABLED X
3381
POWER FAIL
7110
BR BROKEN
FF54
RUN DISABL
3381
POWF INV x
7111
BR WIRING
FF55
OVER SWFREQ
Fault tracing
278
Fault
number
Fault name
FF56
MOTOR PHASE
FF5F
ILLEGAL
INSTRUCTION
FF68
ID N CHANGED
FF69
MACRO CHANGE
FF6A
UNDERLOAD
FF7A
START INHIBI
FF7E
FOLLOWER FLT
FF7F
SWC ON INHIB
FF80
DC HIGH RUSH
FF81
IN CHOKE TEMP
FF82
CHOKE OTEMP
FF83
FAN OVERTEMP
FF84
ID RUN FAIL
FF85
FF86
FF87
SYNCRO SPEED
FF88
MOD BOARD T
FF89
MOD CHOKE
FF91
T MEAS CIRC
FF96
FF97
LSU START
FFA0
POWFAIL FILE
FFA1
USER MACRO
FFA2
BACKUP ERROR
FFA3
BACKUP USED
FFA5
POWDOWN FILE
FFA6
DDF FORMAT
FFA7
FACTORY FILE
FFA8
NVOS ERROR
FFD6
AP PRG ERR
Fault tracing
Fault
number
Fault name
Fault
number
Fault name
279
Application macros
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the intended use and operation of the system application
macros. It also describes how to save a user macro, and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting the drive, the
user selects the FACTORY macro by parameter 99.11 APPLICATION MACRO,
makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro (USER 1 or 2
SAVE). User macro settings can be recalled (USER 1 or 2 LOAD). The table below
contains a summary of the macros.
Macro
Suitable applications
Factory
Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds are
used:
- conveyors
- speed controlled pumps and fans
- test benches with predefined constant speeds.
User
The user can save the customised standard macro i.e. the parameter settings and the
results of the motor identification to permanent memory, and recall the data at a later
time.
USER 1/2 SAVE
There are three parameter files available in the FPROM memory: PARAMETER.ddf,
USER_MACRO1.ddf and USER_MACRO2.ddf.
With Factory macro all parameter changes are saved automatically to file
PARAMETER.ddf. When user macros are in use, all parameter changes must be
saved to the corresponding user macro file by parameter 99.11 APPLICATION
MACRO. See section User macros on page 280.
Application macros
280
User macros
It is possible to create two user macros. They can be saved and restored by
parameters 99.09 APPLIC RESTORE and 99.11 APPLICATION MACRO. The user
macro allows the user to save parameter settings including parameter group 99
START-UP DATA and the results of the motor identification to permanent memory,
and to recall the data at a later time.
Two user macros are essential when switching between two motors is required.
How to create user macro 1
Adjust parameters.
Perform the motor identification.
Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by setting
parameter 99.11 to USER 1 SAVE (and press ENTER). The storing takes 20 s to
1 min.
Note: If user macro save function is executed several times, drive memory fills up
and file compression starts. File compression can last up to 10 minutes. Macro
saving will be completed after the file compression. (Operation is indicated on the
last row of the control panel display by blinking dots).
How to recall user macro 1
Change parameter 99.11 to USER 1 LOAD.
Press ENTER to load.
User macros can also be activated by 07.03 AUX CTRL WORD 2 bit 12 or via digital
input, if the function is enabled by parameter 16.05 USER MACRO CHG. See also
parameter 10.10 I/O MACRO CHANGE. The status of the active macro can be
monitored with 08.02 AUX STATUS WORD bits 14 and 15.
Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP
DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond
to the used motor.
See also section User macro save with DriveWindow on page 123.
Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust
the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is
changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros.
When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user macro needs to be loaded,
and the drive is ready to operate.
Application macros
281
Fieldbus control
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over
a communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus
controller via an adapter module. The drive can be set to receive all of its control
information through the external control interface, or the control can be distributed
between the external control interface and other available sources, for example
digital and analogue inputs.
The following diagram shows the control interfaces and I/O connections of the drive.
Fieldbus
controller
Fieldbus
Other
devices
ACS800
(*
(*
Fieldbus adapter
Rxxx
Controller
Modbus
RMIO board
Slot 1
(*
RMBA-01 adapter
std. Modbus link
I/O adapter
RTAC/RDIO/RAIO
Slot 1 or 2
RDCO comm.
module
Advant
controller
(e.g. AC 800M,
AC 80)
CH1
AIMA-01 I/O
(DDCS) adapter module
CH0
(DDCS)
Fieldbus adapter
Nxxx
or
Data Flow
Control Word (CW)
References
Either an Rxxx or Nxxx, and an RMBA-01 adapter can be connected to the drive simultaneously.
Fieldbus control
282
Modbus
ACS800
RMIO board
RPBA-01 adapter
PROFIBUS-DP link
Slot 1
RMBA-01 adapter
std. Modbus link
Slot 2
The control (i.e. the Main Reference data set, see section Data sets 1 and 2 on
page 289) is activated by setting parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE to FIELDBUS
or STD MODBUS.
In case there is a communication problem with one fieldbus, the control can be
switched to the other fieldbus. Switching between the buses can be controlled
e.g. with adaptive programming. Parameters and signals can be read by both
fieldbuses, but simultaneous cyclical writing to the same parameter is forbidden.
RDCO channels CH0...3
The following table gives information on the DDCS (Distributed Drives
Communication System) channels CH0...CH3 of the RDCO module (DDCS
Communication Option).
Channel Interfaces
CH0
RDCO-01*
RDCO-02*
Advant controller
10 MBd
5 MBd
Fieldbus Interface
DDCS/DriveBus
CH1
5 MBd
5 MBd
CH2
Master/Follower
10 MBd
10 MBd
CH3
10 MBd
10 MBd
The RMIO board CH0 supports either DriveBus or DDCS protocol. DriveBus
protocol is faster than the DDCS protocol.
Fieldbus control
283
Alternative
settings
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
98.02
COMM.
MODULE
NO
FIELDBUS
ADVANT/N-FB
STD MODBUS
70.01 CH0
NODE ADDR
0-254
71.01 CH0
DRIVEBUS
MODE*
YES =
DriveBus mode
NO = DDCS
mode
NO
70.04 CH0
TIMEOUT
0...60000 ms
70.05 CH0
COM LOSS
CTRL
STOP
RAMPNG
STOP TORQ
COAST STOP
LAST SPEED
CNST SPEED1
Fieldbus control
284
70.19 CH0
HW
CONNECTI
ON
RING
STAR
51.02
(FIELDBUS
PARAMETE
R 2)
These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual.
Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.
...
51.26
(FIELDBUS
PARAMETE
R 26)
51.27 FBA
PAR
REFRESH**
(0) DONE;
(1) REFRESH
51.28 FILE
CPI FW
REV**
xyz (binary
coded
decimal)
51.29 FILE
CONFIG ID**
xyz (binary
coded
decimal)
51.30 FILE
CONFIG
REV**
xyz (binary
coded
decimal)
51.31 FBA
STATUS**
(0) IDLE;
(1) EXEC. INIT;
(2) TIME OUT;
(3) CONFIG
ERROR;
(4) OFF-LINE;
(5) ON-LINE;
(6) RESET
Fieldbus control
285
51.32 FBA
CPI FW
REV**
51.33 FBA
APPL FW
REV**
90 D SET
REC
ADDR...93 D
SET TR
ADDR
Alternative settings
Function/Information
98.02 COMM.
MODULE
NO
FIELDBUS
ADVANT/N-FB
STD MODBUS
STD MODBUS
52.01STATION
NUMBER
1...247
52.02
BAUDRATE
52.03 PARITY
NONE1STOPBIT
NONE2STOPBIT
ODD
EVEN
Fieldbus control
286
The drive parameters, data words, references and actual values are mapped into the
4xxyy register area:
Signal
Address
Modbus address
40001
Reference 1 (REF1)
40002
Reference 2 (REF2)
40003
40004
Actual 1 (ACT1)
40005
Actual 2 (ACT2)
40006
For the mapping of other signals and parameters see section Modbus and Modbus
Plus address on page 128.
More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website
http://www.modicon.com.
Modbus link
The CDP 312R control panel, NLMD-01 Led Monitoring Display panel or
DriveWindow can be connected to the drive through a Modbus link. The
communication speed of the link is 9600 bit/s (8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity).
The connected device is the master of the communication link. NBCI-01 Bus
Connection Modules must be used if the distance between the panel and the drive is
over three metres.
Modbus is designed for integration with Modicon PLCs (PLC = Programmable Logic
Controller) or other automation devices, and its services correspond mainly to the
PLC architecture. The drive looks like a Modicon PLC from the network.
Fieldbus control
287
TB811
TB810
RDCO-02
RDCO-03
If branching unit NDBU-85/95 is used with CI810A, TB810 Optical ModuleBus Port
Interface must be used.
Fieldbus control
288
The following table lists the parameters, which need to be defined when setting up
communication between the drive and Advant controller.
Parameter
Alternative
settings
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
98.02 COMM.
MODULE
NO
FIELDBUS
ADVANT/N-FB
STD MODBUS
ADVANT/N-FB
70.01 CH0
NODE ADDR
0-254
71.01 CH0
DRIVEBUS
MODE.*
YES = DriveBus
mode
NO = DDCS mode
70.04 CH0
TIMEOUT
0-60000 ms
70.05 CH0
COM LOSS
CTRL
STOP RAMPNG
STOP TORQ
COAST STOP
LAST SPEED
CNST SPEED1
70.19 CH0 HW
CONNECTION
RING
STAR
YES
90 D SET REC
ADDR...93 D
SET TR ADDR
* Parameter is valid after the next power-up of the drive.
Fieldbus control
289
DW
Signal
Address
Update time
Control Word
10 ms
Reference 1
10 ms
Reference 2
10 ms
Status Word
10 ms
Actual 1
10 ms
Actual 2
10 ms
DW
Signal
Address
Update time
Control Word
10 ms
Reference 1
10 ms
Status Word
10 ms
Actual 1
10 ms
Fieldbus control
290
Fieldbus control
291
Data word
Time (1
Default address
Parameter (2
10 (3
2 ms
90.01
2 ms
90.02
2 ms
90.03
4 ms
90.04
4 ms
90.05
4 ms
90.06
10 ms
90.07
10 ms
90.08
12
(3
14
16
18
20
22
24 4)
26, 28, 30
32
10 ms
90.09
10 ms
90.10
10 ms
90.11
10 ms
90.12
100 ms
90.13
100 ms
90.14
100 ms
90.15
100 ms
90.16
100 ms
90.17
100 ms
90.18
100 ms
91.01
100 ms
91.02
100 ms
91.03
100 ms
91.04
100 ms
91.05
100 ms
91.06
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
100 ms
100 ms
Transmit data
100 ms
Inquire address
Transmit address
1)
Time inside which the drive reads data from the data sets to the parameter table or writes data from
the parameter table to the data sets. Since the drive is a follower of the communication master,
the actual communication cycle time depends on the communication speed of the master.
2)
Selects the addresses into which the received fieldbus data sets are written.
3)
Boolean data type parameters are not supported. If boolean data type parameters need to be set
from external control system, use data sets 14...24.
4)
Data set 24 can also be selected for mailbox use. See parameter 70.33 MAILBOX DS SEL.
Fieldbus control
292
Data word
Time (1
Default address
Parameter (2
11 3)
2 ms
92.01
2 ms
92.02
2 ms
92.03
4 ms
92.04
4 ms
92.05
4 ms
92.06
13 3)
15
17
19
21
23
25
4)
10 ms
92.07
10 ms
92.08
10 ms
92.09
10 ms
92.10
10 ms
10 ms
100 ms
92.13
100 ms
92.14
100 ms
100 ms
92.16
100 ms
92.17
100 ms
92.18
100 ms
93.01
100 ms
93.02
100 ms
93.03
100 ms
93.04
100 ms
93.05
100 ms
93.06
27, 29, 31
33
92.11
92.12
92.15
Not in use
1
100 ms
100 ms
Inquired data
100 ms
1)
Time inside which the drive reads data from the data sets to the parameter table or writes data from
the parameter table to the data sets. Since the drive is a follower of the communication master,
the actual communication cycle time depends on the communication speed of the master.
2)
Selects the data sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master station.
3)
Boolean data type parameters are not supported. If boolean data type parameters need to be set to
the external control system, use data sets 1525.
4)
Fieldbus control
Data set 25 can also be selected for mailbox use. See parameter 70.33 MAILBOX DS SEL.
293
Fieldbus control
294
Fieldbus control
295
Control examples
Control example: START by AUTO- or DC MAGN-mode, STOP by ramp generator control
State
1
DC Voltage ON
FLUX
23.01 SPEED REF
Par. 50.10 ABOVE SPEED LIMIT
0%
MOTOR SPEED
100%
0 rpm
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0 RDY ON
1 RDY RUN
2 RDY REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF 2 STA
5 OFF 3 STA
6 SWC ON INHIB
7 ALARM
8 AT SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE LIMIT
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
2 RAMP BYPASS
3 BAL RAMP OUT
4 FLUX ON DC
5 FLUX ON
6
7
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
...
4 ZERO SPEED
0
0
0
0
Fieldbus control
296
DC Voltage ON
100%
FLUX
0%
MOTOR SPEED
1
1
1
4
6
0
0
0
1
10 REMOTE CMD
0 RDY ON
1 RDY RUN
2 RDY REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF 2 STA
5 OFF 3 STA
6 ON INHIBITED
7 ALARM
8 AT SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE LIMIT
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
...
4 ZERO SPEED
Fieldbus control
10
0
1
1
1
9 INCHING2
0
1
2 RAMP BYPASS
3 BAL RAMP OUT
4 FLUX ON DC
5 FLUX ON
6
7
0 rpm
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
297
Control example: FAULT RESET, RUN by CONST SPEED 1 (INCHING 1), CONST
SPEED 2, (INCHING 2) and SPEED REF
State
DC Voltage ON
100%
FLUX
0%
MOTOR SPEED
0 rpm
1
0 ON, OFF1
1 OFF2
2 OFF3
3 RUN
4 RAMP OUT ZERO
5 RAMP HOLD
6 RAMP IN ZERO
7 RESET
8 INCHING1
9 INCHING2
10 REMOTE CMD
0 RDY ON
1 RDY RUN
2 RDY REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF 2 STA
5 OFF 3 STA
6 ON INHIBITED
7 ALARM
8 AT SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE LIMIT
0
1
2 RAMP BYPASS
3 BAL RAMP OUT
4 FLUX ON DC
5 FLUX ON
6
7
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
...
4 ZERO SPEED
1
1
1
1
0
0
7
8
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
Fieldbus control
298
Control example: Emergency Stop (OFF3) with ramp and AUTO RESTART after
a short supply power failure
State
DC Voltage
100%
UDC 75%
Undervoltage trip limit
0%
100%
0%
FLUX
23.01 SPEED REF
Par. 50.10 ABOVE SPEED LIMIT
MOTOR SPEED
0 ON, OFF1
1 OFF2
2 OFF3
3 RUN
4 RAMP OUT ZERO
5 RAMP HOLD
6 RAMP IN ZERO
7 RESET
8 INCHING1
9 INCHING2
10 REMOTE CMD
0 RDY ON
1 RDY RUN
2 RDY REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF 2 STA
5 OFF 3 STA
6 ON INHIBITED
7 ALARM
8 AT SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE LIMIT
0 rpm
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
*)
1
1
1
0
1
1
1)
2)
0
0
1
1
1
0 ON, OFF1
7 RESET
0
...
3 MAGNETIZED
...
4 ZERO SPEED
Fieldbus control
299
1 6 .0 1
E N A B L E
Z E R O
S P E E D
D I
1 0 .0 3
R E S E T
Z E R O
D I
R E S E T
S P E E D L IM IT
P a r.
g ro u p
9 0 , 9 2
R E A D /
W R IT E
F U N C
2 0 .0 3
2 1 .0 3
8 .0 2 b 1 1
S T A R T / S T O P
D S 1 .1
D S 1 0
....
D S 2 4
D S 8 1 .1
D I
D I2
D I1
S T O P F U N C T IO N
1 0 .0 1
S T A R T /S T O P
F ie ld b u s
A d a p te rs
N -ty p e o f
F ie ld b u s
A B B
A u t o m a t io n ,
F ie ld b u s
A d a p te r
R M B A -0 1
1 0 .0 7
H A N D /A U T O
R U N
N O
E M E R G E N C Y
S T O P
D ig ita l in p u ts
I/O
S T A R T
/ S T O P
L O G IC
I/O
C O N T R O L
R E S E T
R A M P
IN Z E R O
R U N
O F F
N O
A D V A N T /N -F B
F IE L D B U S
M O D B U S
S T D
b it 7
b it 6
b it 3
b it 0
M C W
I/O
R U N
M A IN
D IS A B L E D
F e e d b a c k o f D C s w itc h
w ith M u ltid r iv e s y s te m s
R 2 i...R 5 i, R 7 i
8 .0 2 b 4
C O M M M O D U L E
9 8 .0 2
E V E N T
C H A R G IN G
L O G IC
C O N T R O L
L O S S C T R L
C H 0 T IM E O U T
C O N T R O L - S Y S T E M
S T A T U S W O R D
R U N
&
&
R U N
O F F 3
O F F 2
&
&
Z E R O
2 .2 9
M C W
R E S E T B it 7
O N b it0 * * )
B IT
F O L L O W E R
M C W M A S K
7 0 .3 4
D D C S
C H 1
c o m m u n ic a t io n
S T A T E
M A C H IN E
A B B
D R IV E
P R O F IL E
U S E D M C W
2 .2 6
F o llo w e r
M C W
s e le c to r
R U N IN T E R L O C K
D S M C W
fro m
M /F lin k
8 .0 1 b 1 3
M O D U L A T IN G
O F F 3 S T A
8 .0 1 b 1 4
O F F 2 S T A
8 .0 2 b 5
E M E R G E N C Y
S T O P
8 .0 1 b 4
R O 1
p a g e 1 (1 0 )
S U P P L Y U N IT
C O N T R O L
( w ith s in g le d r iv e s )
R A M P IN
R A M P O U T Z E R O
O F F 2
O F F 3
IN T E R N A L M C W
C O N T R O L
A P P L IC A T IO N
8 .0 1 b 0
C H 0 / F IE L D B U S
C O M M L O S S
C O N T R O L
A U T O R E S T A R T
F U N C T IO N
> 1
7 .0 1
M C W
S T O P
F U N C T IO N
E M
* ) N o t e ! R U N I N T E R L O C K c a n b e c o n n e c t e d to e .g . d ig ita l in p u t b y A d a p t iv e P r o g r a m m in g .
* * ) N o te ! S ta r tin g o f m o d u la tio n c a n b e s e p a r a te d to fr e e b it o f M C W w ith p a r a m e te r 9 5 .0 6 L S U R U N
M A IN
7 0 .0 5
7 0 .0 4
2 1 .1 0
2 1 .0 9
1 6 .1 4
b it 0 R D Y _ O N
IN T E R L O C K
R E S T A R T
R U N
R E S T A R T T IM E
A U T O
C H 0 C O M
A U T O
*)
S U P P L Y U N IT M S W
S U P P L Y U N IT C O N T R O L A C T IV A T E D
L O C A L M C W
C O N T R O L W O R D
I/O
2 0 .0 3
L O C A L C O N T R O L
S P E E D L IM IT
2 1 .1 2
L O C A L E M S T O P M O D E
Z E R O
2 1 .0 7
2 1 .0 6
D E L
E M S T O P D E R M IN L
E M S T O P D E C M O N
2 1 .0 5
2 1 .0 4
E M S T O P D E R M A X L
E M E S T O P M O D E
R e la y o u tp u t
300
A I/O
A I/O
1 3 .0 5
V A L U E
A I2
M IN IM U M
1 3 .0 2
V A L U E
A I1
A I1 L O W
M IN IM U M
1 3 .0 9
V A L U E
A I3
A I3 L O W
M IN IM U M
9 8 .1 4
9 8 .1 5
9 8 .1 3
A I1 E X T 2 M O D E
A I2 E X T 2 M O D E
E X T 2 L O C A T IO N
1 3 .1 1
F IL T E R A I3
1 3 .1 0
1 3 .0 8
A I3 H IG H V A L U E
9 8 .1 1
1 3 .0 3
E X T 1 L O C A T IO N
F IL T E R A I1
1 3 .0 1
A I1 H IG H V A L U E
1 3 .1 2
1 3 .0 7
F IL T E R A I2
1 3 .0 6
1 3 .0 4
A I2 H IG H V A L U E
A I2 L O W
1 0 .0 2
D IR E C T IO N
E X T 2 :A I2
E X T 2 :A I1
A I/O
E X T E N S IO N
M O D U L E 2
A I3
R M IO
A N A L O G U E
IN P U T
E X T 1 :A I2
E X T 1 :A I1
A I/O
E X T E N S IO N
M O D U L E 1
R M IO
A N A L O G U E
IN P U T
A I1
A I2
R M IO
A N A L O G U E
IN P U T
D I
9 8 .0 6
1 .4 2
1 .4 1
1 .2 1
( u n s c a le d )
&
E X T 2 A I2
E X T 2 A I1
A I3 [m A ]
E X T M O D U L E 1
9 8 .0 6
= T E M P M E A S
A I/O
= N O
= P T 1 0 0 o r P T C
3 0 .0 3
0 = F O R W A R D D IR E C T IO N
1 = R E V E R S E D IR E C T IO N
M O D U L E = N O
&
M O T 2 T E M P A L M
T O R Q U E R E F E R E N C E B
3 0 .0 8
3 0 .0 7
I/O S P E E D
R E F E R E N C E
1 .2 0
1 .1 9
P T 1 0 0
P T C
M O T O R 2
T E M P E R A T U R E
P R O T E C T IO N
A I2 [m A ]
A I1 [V ]
M O T O R
M O D E L
P T 1 0 0
P T C
M O T O R 1
T E M P E R A T U R E
P R O T E C T IO N
A P P L IC A T IO N p a g e 2 (1 0 )
A I2 u n s c a le d
A I2 u n s c a le d
R M IO
A I1 u n s c a le d
A I1 u n s c a le d
&
E X T 1 A I/O
R M IO
E X T 1 A I/O
9 8 .1 1
9 8 .0 6
M O T O R 2 T E M P
1 .1 7
M O T 2 T E M P F L T L
E X T 1 L O C A T IO N = N O T IN U S E
(1 0 0 0 0 = = M O T O R N O M IN A L T O R Q U E )
I/O
A I/O
3 0 .0 5
3 0 .0 4
3 0 .0 3 = 1 ...3 x P T 1 0 0 o r E X T T E M P
E X T M O D U L E 1 = U N IP O L A R o r B IP O L A R A I
S C A L IN G
M O T O R 1 T E M P
1 .1 6
M O T 1 T E M P F L T L
M O T 1 T E M P A L M
1 1 .0 3
E X T R E F E R E N C E
1 1 .0 1
I/O S P E E D A N D T O R Q U E R E F E R E N C E S A N D
M O T O R T E M P E R A T U R E P R O T E C T IO N - S Y S T E M
A I/O
S C A L IN G
9 8 .0 6
9 8 .0 2
3 0 .0 3 = 1 ...3 x P T 1 0 0 o r P T C
A I/O E X T M O D U L E 1
= U N IP O L A R o r B IP O L A R
C O M M
E X T R E F 1 S E L E C T = S T D A I2
-1
(2 0 0 0 0 = = P a r. 5 0 .0 1 S P E E D S C A L IN G )
301
1 0 .0 4
S Y N C C M D
P u ls e E n c o d e r
a lte r n a tiv e
P u ls e E n c o d e r
D I
5 0 .0 5
E N C O D E R A L M /F L T = A L A R M
7 .0 2 b 1 0
7 .0 2 b 1 1
R E S E T S Y N C
> 1
P O S IT IO N
C O U N T E R
F U N C T IO N
E N C O D E R
S P E E D
C A L C
&
&
1 .0 2
M O T O R
S Y N C R D Y
p a g e 3 (1 0 )
P O S C O U N T R O U N D S
5 0 .1 0
x .x x > x
x .x x
x x .x x
x x .x x
5 0 .1 2
5 0 .0 6
S P A C T F IL T T IM E
L IM IT
S P F IL T T IM
A B O V E S P E E D
P O S C O U N T D E G R E E S
P O S C O U N T H IG H
P O S C O U N T L O W
S P E E D E S T IM A T E D
A P P L IC A T IO N
8 .0 2 b 5
3 .1 0
3 .0 9
3 .0 8
3 .0 7
M O T O R
M O D E L
S P E E D M E A S U R E D
1 .0 3
M E A S U R E M E N T C H A IN - S Y S T E M
R D Y
S Y N C D IS A B L E
5 0 .1 4
P O S C O U N T IN IT H IG H
7 .0 2 b 9
5 0 .1 4
S Y N C C O M M A N D
5 0 .0 7
P O S C O U N T M O D E
P O S C O U N T IN IT L O W
5 0 .1 3
5 0 .1 4
D E T E C T D E L A Y
S P E E D H O L D T IM E
Z E R O
5 0 .1 1
E N C O D E R D E L A Y
5 0 .0 4
5 0 .0 5
5 0 .0 2
E N C O D E R P U L S E N R
E N C O D E R A L M /F L T
5 0 .0 1
S P E E D S C A L IN G
9 8 .0 1
S P E E D M E A S M O D E
E N C O D E R M O D U L E
S P E E D
S Y N C C O M M A N D
P u ls e
E n c o d e r
M o d u le
N T A C -0 2
P u ls e
E n c o d e r
M o d u le
R T A C -0 1
5 0 .0 3
S P E E D F B S E L = E N C O D E R
E N C O D E R E R R O R
5 0 .0 5
E N C O D E R A L M /F L T = F A U L T
M O T O R S P E E D F IL T
1 .0 1
T o s p e e d c o n tro l
1 .0 4
M O T O R S P E E D
8 .0 1 b 1 0
A B O V E L IM IT
B it o f p a c k e d b o o le a n w o r d
R e a d o n ly s ig n a l
P a ra m e te r (s a v e d to F L A S H
m e m o ry )
In p u t fo r re fe re n c e o r c o m m a n d
F IL T E R
F IL T E R
S P E E D
M O N IT O R
302
Speed measurement
D S 1 .2
F ie ld b u s
A d a p te rs
P a r.
g ro u p
9 0 , 9 2
R E A D /
W R IT E
F U N C
1
N O
A D V A N T /N -F B
F IE L D B U S
M O D B U S
S T D
7 0 .1 7
7 .0 3 b 7
S P E E D
9 9 .0 8
D S S P E E D
2 .1 9
7 0 .0 8
R E F
&
1 1 .0 2
9 8 .0 2
S P E E D R E F E R E N C E
R E F = O N
- S Y S T E M
A P P L IC A T IO N
&
2 .2 5
A D D IT IV E
S P E E D R E F
2 3 .1 7
p a g e 4 (1 0 )
U S E D S P E E D R E F
2 .2 7
R A M P E D IN C H R E F
7 .0 2 b 1 2
L IM IT E R
S P E E D R E F 2
2 .0 1
P a ra m e te r (s a v e d to F L A S H
R e a d o n ly s ig n a l
B it o f p a c k e d b o o le a n w o r d
x x .x x
x .x x
x .x x > x
m e m o ry )
In p u t fo r re fe re n c e o r c o m m a n d
2 0 .0 2
2 0 .0 1
x x .x x
2 3 .0 5
S P E E D
M A X IM U M
S P E E D S H A R E
E N A B L E R A M P E D IN C H R E F
F R E Q U E N C Y R E F E R E N C E
( s e e fig u r e o n p a g e 1 0 )
I/O
A I+ F B A S P E E D
L O C A L C O N T R O L
C O M M M O D U L E = N O
2 3 .0 1
R E F E R E N C E C H A IN
S P E E D R E F
L O C A L R E F
L O C A L C O N T R O L
L O C A L C O N T R O L
F O L L O W E R S P E E D R E F
C O M M M O D U L E
9 8 .0 2
M A S T E R
R E F = M A S T E R
R E F = O N
7 .0 3 b 6
C H 2 M /F M O D E = F O L L O W E R
F O L L S P E E D
M O T O R C T R L M O D E = S C A L A R
S P E E D R E F E R E N C E
D S 1 0
....
D S 2 4
A B B
A u t o m a t io n ,
N -ty p e o f
F ie ld b u s
A d a p te rs
I/O
D S 8 1 .2
r /
e r
a tio n
c e
F ie ld b u s
A d a p te r
R M B A -0 1
M a s te
F o llo w
a p p lic
in te r fa
D S 4 1 .2
D A T A S E T
F O L L S P E E D
F O L L R E F S E L A C W 2 = O N
S P E E D
M IN IM U M
303
Speed reference
B it o f p a c k e d b o o le a n w o r d
x .x x > x
2 2 .0 2
2 2 .0 4
2 2 .0 5
D E C E L E R T IM E
E M E S T O P R A M P
S H A P E T IM E
2 2 .0 6
V A R S L O P E R A T E
2 2 .0 7
L O C A L C O N T R O L
V A R IA B L E S L O P E
7 .0 1 b 5
2 2 .0 3
A C C /D E C T IM E S C L E
R A M P H O L D
2 2 .0 1
S P E E D R E F 2
2 .0 1
&
V A R IA B L E
S L O P E
F U N C T IO N
D E C E L .
A C C E L .
A C C /D E C
2 2 .0 8
7 .0 2 b 3
B A L R A M P R E F
( d n
re f
W ID T H P O S
W ID T H N E G
W IN D O W
2 3 .1 9
&
&
W IN D O W
F O L L S P D C O R M O D E
2 3 .1 8
F O L L S P D C T R L C O R
2 .2 0
2 5 .0 3
R E F A
L O A D S H A R E
D S T O R Q
S P E E D C O N T R O L
2 3 .0 3
C O N S T S P E E D 2
0
2 3 .0 2
C O N S T S P E E D 1
7 .0 1 b 9
&
2 .0 2
-1
2 3 .0 9
2 3 .0 8
A D S H
N C T IO
E E D
N T R O
L L O W
L L E D
E R
A R E
N O F
S P E E D
S P E E D
A P P L IC A T IO N
M IN L IM
M A X L IM
L IM IT E R
7 .0 3 b 9
F O L
8 .0
F O L
8 .0
S P E E D C O R R E C T IO N
2 3 .0 4
F O L L S P D C O R R E N A
L O
F U
S P
C O
F O
M A X IM U M
M IN IM U M
S P E E D R E F 3
S P E E D R E F E R E N C E R A M P C H A IN -S Y S T E M
/ d t )
d V /d t
2 .1 6
7 .0 2 b 2
7 .0 1 b 4
IN C H IN G
7 .0 1 b 8
7 .0 1 b 6
R A M P _ IN _ Z E R O
1
7 .0 1 b 5
IN C H IN G
7 .0 1 b 4
R A M P _ O U T _ Z E R O
R A M P H O L D
R A M P O U T Z E R O
B A L R A M P O U T
A C C E L E R T IM E
R A M P IN
Z E R O
7 .0 1 b 6
7 .0 1 b 2
> 1
R e a d o n ly s ig n a l
x .x x
E M E R G E N C Y
S T O P O F F 3
P a ra m e te r (s a v e d to F L A S H m e m o ry )
x x .x x
R A M P B Y P A S S
In p u t fo r re fe re n c e o r c o m m a n d
x x .x x
L IM IT E R
S P D _ C O R _ M IN _ L IM
S P D _ C O R _ M A X _ L IM
2 .3 0
F O L L S P D
C O R R O U T
p a g e 5 (1 0 )
L _
4 b
L _
4 b
2 0 .0 2
2 0 .0 1
2 .1 8
S P E E D R E F 4
304
W ID T H
W ID T H
C T R L
IN T G
W IN D O W
W IN D O W
W IN D O W
2 3 .1 6
O N
N E G
P O S
F IL T E R
2 3 .0 7
7 .0 2 b 7
2 3 .0 9
2 3 .0 8
R F E
2 4 .0 2
N E G
2 3 .1 0
&
W IN D O W
S P E E D S T E P
S P E E D
E R R O R
2 .0 3
D R O O P R A T E
W IN D O W
O F P O L E
2 3 .1 5
F R E Q U E N C Y O F P O L E
D A M P IN G
2 3 .1 4
O F Z E R O
D A M P IN G
2 3 .1 3
2 3 .0 6
F R E Q U E N C Y O F Z E R O
F IL T
2 3 .1 2
S U B
F IL T E R
R F E S P E E D
S P E E D E R R O R
M O T O R S P E E D
1 .0 4
S P E E D R E F 4
2 .1 8
-1
2 4 .1 9
2 4 .2 0
K P S V A L M IN F R E Q
T IS V A L M IN F R E Q
K P S
L
E Q
E Q
K P S V A L
M IN F R E Q
T O R Q
R E F 2
K P
T IS
K P S V A
M IN F R
F R
K P S T IS
M A X F R E Q
K P S T IS
M IN F R E Q
K P S ,
T IS
K P S
W E A K P O IN T
K P S
M IN
K P S
A C C E L E R
C O M P
C O N T R O L - S Y S T E M
2 4 .1 8
K P S T IS M A X F R E Q
S P E E D
2 4 .1 7
2 4 .1 3
F R E Q
K P S T IS M IN
D E R IV F IL T T IM E
2 4 .1 2
2 4 .1 0
T IS IN IT V A L U E
D E R IV A T IO N T IM E
2 4 .0 9
S E T P O IN T W E IG H T
2 4 .0 8
T IS
S E T P W E IG H T IN G
2 4 .0 7
2 4 .0 6
2 4 .0 5
K P S W E A K P O IN T
2 4 .0 4
K P S W P F IL T T IM E
2 4 .0 3
K P S
2 .0 2
2 4 .1 5
2 4 .1 4
K P S M IN
S P E E D R E F 3
C O M P F IL T T IM E
A C C
T IM E
C O M P D E R
A C C
2 .0 5
T O R Q U E D E R
R E F
2 .0 6
T O R Q U E
IN T E G
R E F
A P P L IC A T IO N
2 4 .1 1
7 .0 2 b 8
S P C T O R Q M IN
S P C T O R Q M A X
p a g e 6 (1 0 )
B A L R E F
B A L _ N C O N T
A C C C O M P R E F
T O R Q U E P R O P R E F
2 .0 4
T O R Q
2 .0 7
S P C
8 .0
S P C
8 .0
T O R Q
3 b 1
T O R Q
3 b 2
B it o f p a c k e d b o o le a n w o r d
R e a d o n ly s ig n a l
x .x x
x .x x > x
P a ra m e te r (s a v e d to F L A S H
m e m o ry )
M A X L IM
M IN L IM
T O R Q U E R E F 2
2 .0 9
In p u t fo r re fe re n c e o r c o m m a n d
L IM IT E R
x x .x x
x x .x x
2 0 .0 8
2 0 .0 7
305
Speed control
I/O
D S 1 .3
D S 1 .3
D S 1 0 .3
9 8 .0 2
C O M M
F IE L D B U S T O R Q U E R E F B
(N -ty p e o r R M B A -0 1 )
T O R Q U E R E F E R E N C E B
M O D U L E = N O
9 8 .0 2
M O D U L E = F IE L D B U S
7 0 .0 8
C O M M
9 8 .0 2
M O D B U S
F IE L D B U S
> 1
2 5 .0 1
R E F A
&
T O R Q
L O C A L R E F
T O R Q U E C O N T R O L
L O C A L C O N T R O L
T O R Q U E R E F A
D S T O R Q
2 .2 0
&
F IL T E R
S H A R E
R A M P D O W N
2 5 .0 6
2 5 .0 5
A P P L IC A T IO N
R A M P U P
2 5 .0 4
T O R Q U E R E F B
T O R Q
2 5 .0 2
R E F A
L O A D
T O R Q
R E F A F T C
2 .2 8
U S E D T O R Q
T O R Q U E R E F E R E N C E C H A IN - S Y S T E M
N O
A D V A N T /N -F B
S T D
M O D U L E
F O L L O W E R T O R Q U E R E F
R - t y p e o f F ie ld b u s A d a p t e r
W ith R - ty p e o f F ie ld b u s a d a p te r s , d e f in e to r q u e r e fe r e n c e
T O R Q U E R E F A o r B in p a r a m e te r g r o u p 5 1 .
P a r.
g ro u p
9 0 , 9 2
R E A D /
W R IT E
F U N C .
M A S T E R
N o te ! W ith o th e r R - ty p e o f F ie ld b u s m o d u le s ,
to r q u e r e fe r e n c e is a s s ig n e d b y P a r . g r o u p 5 1 .
C O M M
N -ty p e o f
F ie ld b u s
A d a p te rs
D S 2 4
D S 1 0
....
A B B
A u t o m a t io n
N -ty p e o f
F ie ld b u s
A d a p te rs
D S 8 1 .3
r /
e r
a tio n
c e
S T D M O D B U S
R M B A -0 1
M a s te
F o llo w
a p p lic
in te r fa
D S 4 1 .3
D A T A S E T
L O C A L C O N T R O L
C H 2 M /F M O D E = F O L L O W E R
7 0 .1 8
7 .0 3 b 8
R E F = M A S T E R
F O L L T O R Q U E R E F = O N
F O L L T O R Q
7 .0 3 b 6
F O L L R E F S E L A C W 2 = O N
R A M P
p a g e 7 (1 0 )
2 5 .0 3
T R E F T O R Q
T R E F T O R Q
M IN
M A X
2 0 .1 0
2 0 .0 9
L IM IT E R
T O R Q
R E F 1
2 .0 8
T R E F T O R Q
M A X L IM
8 .0 3 b 8
T R E F T O R Q
M IN L IM
8 .0 3 b 7
306
Torque reference
Torque reference chain continues on the following page.
T O R Q
P G E N E R A T IN G
2 0 .1 8
L IM
R E F
P M O T O R IN G L IM
2 0 .1 7
1 .0 5
2 .2 3
D C L IM
s p e e d c o n tr o lle r
2 .0 9
T O R Q U E R E F 2
to r q u e r e fe r e n c e c h a in
F R E Q U E N C Y
F ro m
F ro m
2 .0 8
T O R Q U E R E F 1
A D D
M A X
M IN
L IM
L IM
L IM
2 0 .1 3
- S Y S T E M
2 0 .1 2
2 0 .0 5
P U L L O U T T C O F M IN
T O R Q U E
M A X IM U M
2 0 .0 6
2 .1 4
D N
U N D E R V O L T T O R Q
F R E Q
2 .2 2
L IM
3 0 .2 3
L IM
T O R Q M O T O R
8 .0 3 b 0
T O R Q M IN
8 .0 3 b 5
T O R Q M A X L IM
8 .0 3 b 6
T O R Q
A P P L IC A T IO N
T O R Q U E
L IM IT E R
O V E R V O L T A G E C T L
2 0 .1 5
2 0 .1 6
3 0 .2 2
1 .1 0
L IM
U P
V O L T A G E
2 .2 2
F R E Q
2 0 .1 1
2 9 .0 3
U N D E R V O L T A G E C T L
D C
T O R Q
T R IP M A R G IN
U N D E R V O L T T O R Q
F R E Q
F R E Q U E N C Y M IN
2 9 .0 2
1 .0 5
2 .1 2
F R E Q
2 .2 2
IN V E R T E R
M A X IM U M
L IM
D C
D C
R E F
R E F
M A X IM U M
C U R R E N T
C U R R E N T
2 0 .0 4
1 .0 6
O V E R V O L T L IM
8 .0 3 b 1 3
U N D E R V O L T L IM
8 .0 3 b 1 2
T O R Q D C L IM
2 .2 3
F R E Q L IM IT
8 .0 3 b 1 5
F R E Q M IN L IM IT
8 .0 3 b 1 0
F R E Q M A X L IM IT
8 .0 3 b 1 1
T O R Q
M O T O R C U R R E N T
O V E R
V O L T A G E
C O N T R O L
U N D E R
V O L T A G E
C O N T R O L
D C
V O L T A G E
L IM IT E R
F R E Q
L IM IT E R
p a g e 8 (1 0 )
L IM
R E F
R E F
T O R Q U E R E F 5
F R E Q U E N C Y
F R E Q U E N C Y M A X
T O R Q U E R E F 4
2 .1 1
2 6 .0 3
P U L L O U T T C O E F M A X
T O R Q U E
R E F
M IN IM U M
F L U X U S E D
T O R Q U E R E F 3
2 .1 0
2 6 .0 2
T O R Q U E S T E P
T O R Q U E R E F E R E N C E C H A IN
P G E N E R A T IN G
8 .0 4 b 1
P M O T O R IN G
8 .0 4 b 0
T O R Q P O W
2 .2 4
T O R Q U E
S P E E D
R E F
C O M P E N S A T IO N
O S C IL L A T IO N
D A M P IN G
L O A D
T O R Q U E S E L E C T O R
P O W E R
L IM IT
C A L C .
2 6 .0 7
T O R Q U E S E L E C T O R
2 6 .0 1
2 6 .0 6
O S C IL L A T IO N P H A S E
O S C IL L A T IO N G A IN
2 6 .0 4
2 6 .0 5
C O M P E N S A T IO N
S U B
O S C IL L A T IO N F R E Q
O S C
M O T O R S P E E D
1 .0 4
S P E E D R E F 4
2 .1 8
T O R Q U E
L IM IT
C A L C
C U R L IM
R E F
T O R Q IN V C U R L IM
8 .0 3 b 4
T O R Q U S E R
8 .0 3 b 3
T O R Q U S E D
2 .1 3
307
F L U X M IN
2 7 .0 5
P a ra m e te r (s a v e d to F L A S H m e m o ry )
R e a d o n ly s ig n a l
B it o f p a c k e d b o o le a n w o r d
x .x x
x .x x > x
2 7 .0 2
1 .1 0
D C V O L T A G E
p a g e 9 (1 0 )
F L U X A C T
2 .1 3
1 .0 5
T O R Q U E U S E D R E F
F R E Q
M O T O R N O M
2 7 .0 5
F L U X M IN
F R E Q U E N C Y
2 .2 6
U S E D M C W
F L U X
B R A K IN G
2 1 .0 2
C O N S T M A G N T IM E
A P P L IC A T IO N
F L U X B R A K IN G
F L U X A N D D T C C O N T R O L - S Y S T E M
In p u t fo r re fe re n c e o r c o m m a n d
x x .x x
2 7 .0 6
x x .x x
F L U X R A M P G A IN
2 7 .0 4
2 7 .0 1
F L U X O P T IM IS A T IO N
F L U X M A X
2 7 .0 3
1 .0 8
F L U X R E F
M O T O R T O R Q U E
F L U X
O P T IM IS A T IO N
2 1 .0 1
S T A R T F U N C T IO N
1 .0 8
E S T IM A T E a n d
C A L C U L A T E
C A L C U L A T E
A C T U A L V A L U E S
M O T O R M O D E L
2 .1 5
O p tim a l
S w itc h in g
C o n tro l
A S IC
F IE L D W K P O IN T A C T
F L U X M IN L IM IT
C U R R E N T A C T U A L
D C V O L T A G E A C T U A L
M O T O R T O R Q U E
C o n tr o l b its
F lu x b its
T o r q b its
2 .2 1
8 .0 3 b 9
S T A R T F L U X
R E F E R E N C E
S T A R T
D IR E C T T O R Q U E
a n d F L U X
H Y S T E R E S IS
C O N T R O L
IN T E R N A L
F L U X R E F
C A L C U L A T IO N
F IE L D
W E A K E N IN G
C N S T D C M A G N
D C M A G N
A U T O
S T A R T
C O N T R O L
2 .1 4
A C S 8 0 0
F L U X U S E D R E F
308
2 9 .0 3
F R E Q U E N C Y M IN
R E F = O N
1 1 .0 2
C U R R E N T
C U R R E N T
M A X IM U M
M A X IM U M
IN V E R T E R
C U R R E N T
2 0 .0 4
1 .0 6
&
A D D
C U R L IM
R E F
IR
N O M
M O T O R
M A IN
1 .0 5
R E F
2 .1 4
A P P L IC A T IO N
C O N T R O L W O R D
2 9 .0 4
V O L T A G E
F R E Q
C O M P E N S A T IO N
N O M
M O T O R
F R E Q
R E F
F R E Q U E N C Y
S W IT C H IN G
F L U X U S E D
2 9 .0 3
F R E Q U E N C Y M IN
2 9 .0 2
F R E Q U E N C Y M A X
C O N T R O L - S Y S T E M
T O R Q IN V C U R L IM
8 .0 3 b 4
T O R Q U S E R
8 .0 3 b 3
R E F
F R E Q
L IM IT E R
2 2 .0 5
S P E E D S H A R E
2 3 .0 5
F R E Q . R E F
2 9 .0 1
2 9 .0 5
T O R Q U S E D
2 .1 3
S C A L A R
L O C A L R E F
L O C A L C O N T R O L
T O R Q U E
L IM IT
C A L C
S P E E D R E F E R E N C E
M O T O R
I/O
A I+ F B A S P E E D
9 8 .0 2
L IM IT E R
L O C A L C O N T R O L
C O M M M O D U L E = N O
F R E Q U E N C Y R E F E R E N C E
2 9 .0 2
F R E Q U E N C Y M A X
2 2 .0 4
2 2 .0 2
2 2 .0 1
S H A P E T IM E
T IM E
D E C E L E R
E M E S T O P R A M P
T IM E
A C C E L E R
D C
L IM
R E F
V O L T A G E
1 .1 0
2 .2 2
F R E Q
C O N T R O L
V O L T A G E A C T U A L
O p tim a l
S w itc h in g
C o n tro l
A S IC
O V E R
V O L T A G E
C O N T R O L
U N D E R
V O L T A G E
C O N T R O L
D C
V O L T A G E
L IM IT E R
1 .0 8
2 .1 5
M O T O R
D C
D C
R E F
A C S 8 0 0
O V E R V O L T L IM
8 .0 3 b 1 3
U N D E R V O L T L IM
8 .0 3 b 1 2
T O R Q D C L IM
2 .2 3
T O R Q U E
F L U X A C T
C U R R E N T A C T U A L
D C
C o n tr o l b its
F lu x b its
T o r q b its
O V E R V O L T A G E C T L
3 0 .2 3
U N D E R V O L T A G E C T L
3 0 .2 2
T O R Q
p a g e 1 0 (1 0 )
C O M P E N S A T IO N
IR
S C A L A R
R A M P
309
Scalar control
310
311
Terms
Term
Full name
ACS800/ACS600
Description
AC drive
ACU
AGPS
AI
Analogue input
AIMA
AINT
AO
Analogue output
APBU
APC2
AC 80
Advant Controller 80
AC 800M
ASIC
CDP 311
CDP 312R
CE Marking
CI858
DDCC
Communication ASIC
DDCS
DI
Digital input
DO
Digital output
DriveSize
DriveWindow
DSP
Terms
312
Term
Full name
Description
DSU
DTC
EEPROM
Non-volatile memory
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
ESD
Electrostatic discharge
FCB
FCE
FCI
Flash EEPROM
Non-volatile memory
FSR
HW
Hardware
I/O
Input/Output
IC
International Cooling
ICMC
ICU
Incoming Unit
ID run
Identification run
IEC
International Electrotechnical
Commission
IEEE
IGBT
Power semiconductor
IM
International Mounting
IOCC
IP
International Protection
ISO
KLIXON
Terms
Thermal switch
313
Term
Full name
Description
KTY-84-1xx
LCD
LED
Semiconductor
Modbus
Multidrive
NAFA
AF100 Adapter
NAIO
NBCI
NBRA
NBRC
NCPC
NCSA
CS 31 Adapter Module
NDBU
NDIO
NDNA
NDPA
NDPC
NETA
NIBA
NLMD
NMBA
NOCR
NPBA
Terms
314
Term
Full name
Description
NTAC
NTC
PCB
PCMCIA
PE
Protective Earth
PFC
PID
PLC
PPCS
ppr
PROM
Programmable ROM
Pt100
PTC
PTC thermistor
PWM
RAM
Volatile memory
RAIO
RDCO
RDCU
RDIO
RDNA
RMBA
RMIO
RFI
RFE
RMS
RPBA
Terms
315
Term
Full name
Description
RO
Relay output
ROM
Non-volatile memory
RS 232, RS 485
RTAC
SDCS UCM-1
UC resistor board
SDCS -COM-1
Communication board
SDCS-CON-1
Control board
SDCS-IOB-22
SDCS-IOB-23
SDCS-IOE-2
UC measurement board
SDCS-PIN-41
SDCS-PIN-51
Measurement board
SDCS-POW-1
SW
Software
TSU
UART
UPS
UR fuse
VSD
WIDE
WTA
Terms
316
Terms
3AFE64670646 REV D / EN
EFFECTIVE: 10.12.2007
ABB Oy
AC Drives
P.O. Box 184
FI-00381 HELSINKI
FINLAND
Telephone
+358 10 22 11
Fax
+358 10 22 22681
Internet
http://www.abb.com
ABB Inc.
Automation Technologies
Drives & Motors
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151
USA
Telephone
262 785-3200
800-HELP-365
Fax
262 780-5135